Pioneer DVR-LX70 Operating Instructions

HDD/D VD RECORDER Operating Instructions <VRB1477-A> Published b y Pioneer Cor poration. Cop yr ight © 2007 Pioneer Cor poration. All rights reser ved. PIONEER CORPORA TION 4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, T oky o 153-8654, Japan PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. P .O . BO X 1540, Long Beach, Calif or nia 90801-1540, U .S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANAD A, INC. 300 Allstate P arkway , Markham, Ontar io L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411 PIONEER EUROPE NV Hav en 1087, K eetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIA CENTRE PTE. L TD. 253 Ale xandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555 PIONEER ELECTRONICS A USTRALIA PTY . L TD . 178-184 Boundar y Road, Braeside , Victor ia 3195, A ustralia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V . Blvd.Manuel A vila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Me xico ,D .F . 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270 K002_B_En Printed in China 00 Cover_bac k_TF.fm 1 ページ ２００７ 年７月２日　月曜日　 午後４時１８分
Thank you for buying this P ioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate your model properly . After you have finished reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (ser vicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated "dangerous voltage" within the product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. CAUTION: TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE P ARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN IMPOR T ANT D3-4-2-1-1_En-A WARNING This equipment is not waterproof. To prevent a fire or shock hazard, do not place any container filled with liquid near this equipment (such as a vase or flower pot) or expose it to dripping, splashing, rain or moisture. D3-4-2-1-3_B_En W ARNING The voltage of the available power supply differs according to country or r egion. Be sure that the power supply voltage of the area wher e this unit will be used meets the requir ed voltage (e.g., 230 V or 120 V) written on the rear panel. D3-4-2-1-4_A_En Before plugging in for the first time, read the following section carefully . CAUTION This product is a class 1 laser product, but this product contains a laser diode higher than Class 1. T o ensure continued safety , do not remove any covers or attempt to gain access to the rear of the product. Refer all servicing to qualified personnel. The following caution label appears on your unit. Location: inside of the unit D3-4-2-1-8_B_En CAUTION A TTENTION CLASS 3B VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RA DI A TION W HEN OP EN, A VOI D E XPO SU RE T O T HE B EA M. VRW2262 - A RADIA TIONS LASER VISIBLES ET INVISIBLES D E CLASS E 3B QU AND OU VERT . ÉV IT EZ TOUT EXPOSITION AU F AISCEAU. ADV ARSEL KLASSE 3B SYNLIG OG USYNLIG LA SERSTRÅLING VED Å BNING. UN DGÅ UDSÆTTELSE FOR STRÅLING. V ARNING KLASS 3B SYNLIG OC H OSYNLIG LA SER STR Å LNING N ÄR DENNA DEL ÄR ÖPPNAD. UNDVIK AT T U T SÄTT A DI G F ÖR STRÅLEN. V ARO! AV ATT AESSA OLET A L TTIINA NÄKYVÄLLE JA NÄKYMÄTTÖMÄLLE LUOK AN 3 B LA SERSÄ TEIL YLLE. ÄLÄ KATSO SÄ TEESEEN. PRECAUCIÓN CUANDO SE ABRE HA Y RADIACIÓN L ÁSER DE CLASE 3B VISIBLE E I N V I S I B L E . E V I T E LA E X P O S I C I Ó N A LOS R AY OS L Á SER. VORSICHT BEI GEÖFFNETER ABDECKUNG IST SI CH TBA RE UND UN S IC H T BARE LASE RST RAHL UNG DE R K LA SS E 3 B I M G ER Ä TEINNEREN VORH AND EN. NICHT DEM LASERSTRAHL AUSSETZEN! W ARNING T o prevent a fire hazar d, do not place any naked flame sources (such as a lighted candle) on the equipment. D3-4-2-1-7a_A_En DVRLX70_TF_EN.bo ok 2 ページ ２００７年８月１ 日　水曜日　午 後４時１４分
CAUTION The ST ANDBY/ON switch on this unit will not completely shut off all power from the AC outlet. Since the power cord ser ves as the main disconnect device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from the AC outlet to shut down all power . Therefore, make sure the unit has been installed so that the power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC outlet in case of an accident. T o avoid fire hazard, the power cord should also be unplugged from the AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time (for example, when on vacation). D3-4-2-2-2a_A_En Operating Environment Operating environment temperature and humidity : 5 ºC to 35 ºC ( 41 ºF to 95 ºF); less than 85 %RH (cooling vents not blocked) Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or strong artificial light) D3-4-2-1-7c_A_En VENTILA TION CAUTION When installing this unit, make sure to leave space around the unit for ventilation to impr ove heat radiation (at least 10 cm at top, 10 cm at rear , and 10 cm at each side). W ARNING Slots and openings in the cabinet are pr ovided for ventilation to ensure r eliable operation of the product, and to pr otect it from overheating. T o prevent fir e hazard, the openings should never be blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers, table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the equipment on thick carpet or a bed. D3-4-2-1-7b_A_En If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC outlet you want to use, the plug must be removed and appropriate one fitted. Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be per formed only by qualified ser vice personnel. If connected to an AC outlet, the cut-off plug can cause severe electrical shock. Make sure it is properly disposed of after removal. The equipment should be disconnected by removing the mains plug from the wall socket when left unused for a long period of time (for example, when on vacation). D3-4-2-2-1a_A_En This product is for general household purposes. Any failure due to use for other than household purposes (such as long-term use for business purposes in a restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which requires repair will be charged for even during the warranty period. K041_En POWER-CORD CAUTION Handle the power cord by the plug. Do not pull out the plug by tugging the cord and never touch the power cord when your hands are wet as this could cause a short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the unit, a piece of furniture, etc., on the power cord, or pinch the cord. Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cords. The power cords should be routed such that they are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord can cause a fire or give you an electrical shock. Check the power cord once in a while. When you find it damaged, ask your nearest PIONEER authorized ser vice center or your dealer for a replacement. S002_En For T aiwan exclusively T aiwanese two pin flat-bladed plug DVRLX70_TF_EN.bo ok 3 ページ ２００７年８月１ 日　水曜日　午 後４時１４分
01 4 En Contents 01 Before you start What’s in th e box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Putting the batteries in the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Using the remote con trol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Disc/co ntent format pl ayback compatib ility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 About the intern al hard disk drive . . . . . . 12 Symbols used in this manual . . . . . . . . . 1 3 02 Connections Rear panel connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Front panel connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Easy connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Using other types of vi deo output . . . . . . 17 Connecting to a cable box or satell ite receiver (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Connecting to a cable box or satell ite receiver (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Connecting to an AV amplifi er or receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 0 Connecting using HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Connecting other AV sources . . . . . . . . . 23 Connecting a USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Plugging in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 03 Controls and displays Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Remote co ntrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 04 Getting started Switch ing on an d settin g up . . . . . . . . . . 29 05 Recording About DVD recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 About HDD recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Recorded audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 4 Restrict ions on video r ecording . . . . . . . 3 4 Using t he built-in T V tuner . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Setting the picture quality/ recording time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Basic recordi ng from the TV . . . . . . . . . . 3 7 Setting a timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Simultaneous recording and pla yback (Chase Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Recording from an e xternal component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Automatic recording from a satellite tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 7 Playing your recordings on other DVD players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Initializing recordable DVD discs . . . . . . 49 DVD-RW A uto Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 06 Playback Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 1 Basic playba ck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Using the Disc Navigator with recordable discs and the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 5 Using the Disc Navigator with playback-only discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Scanning discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 7 Playing in slow m otion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Frame advance/frame rever se . . . . . . . . 58 The Play Mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 8 Displaying and switching sub titles . . . . . 60 Switch ing DVD and DivX soundtracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Switch ing audio channel s . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Switch ing camera angl es . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Displaying disc informati o n on-screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 DVRLX70_TF_EN.bo ok 4 ページ ２００７年８月１ 日　水曜日　午 後４時１４分
5 En 07 Playing and recording from a DV camcorder Playing from a DV c amcorder . . . . . . . . . 64 Recording from a DV camcorder . . . . . . . 64 About DV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 08 Editing Editing opt ions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 The Disc Navigator screen . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 8 09 Copying and backup Introductio n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 One Touch Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Using Copy Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Using di sc backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 5 10 Using the Jukebox Copying music to th e HDD . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Copying files via U SB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Playing music from the Jukebox . . . . . . . 90 Changing the display style of the Jukebox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Copying albums/tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Editing the HDD Jukebox . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 3 11 The PhotoViewer Locating JPEG picture files . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Changing the disp lay style of the PhotoViewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Playing a slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Reload ing files fro m a disc o r USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Importing files to the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Selecting multiple file s or folders . . . . . . 97 Copying files to a DVD -R/-RW . . . . . . . . . 97 Copying s elected files t o a DVD-R/-RW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Editing files on the HD D . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Printing files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 12 The D isc Setup menu Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Initialize settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Finalize settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Optimize HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Initialize HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 13 The Video Adjust menu Setting the picture quality for TV and external inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Setting the picture quality for disc playbac k . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 6 14 The Initial Setup menu Using the Initial Setup menu . . . . . . . . 1 08 Selecting ot her languages fo r language options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 0 15 Additional information Minimum copying times . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Manual recording modes . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 If the picture freezes and the front panel and remote control buttons stop working . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 On-screen displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 29 Front panel displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Settin g up the remote to control your TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Langua ge code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 33 Country/Area code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Screen sizes and disc formats . . . . . . . 134 Handling discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 5 Cleani ng the picku p lens . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Condensatio n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Hints on instal lation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Moving the recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Resetting the recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Specifica tions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 DVRLX70_TF_EN.bo ok 5 ページ ２００７年８月１ 日　水曜日　午 後４時１４分
Before you start 01 6 En Chapter 1 Before you start What’s in the box Please con firm that the foll owing accessories are in the box when you open it; • Remote control • AA/R6P dry cell batteries x 2 • Audio/video cable (red/wh ite/yellow) • RF antenna cable •P o w e r c a b l e • These operating instructions Putting the batteries in t he remote control • Insert two AA/R6P batteries into the battery compartmen t following the indications (  , ) inside the compartment. Important Incorrect use of ba tteries can result in hazards such as leakage and bursting. Please observe the followin g: • Don’t mix new and old batteries together. • Don’t use different kinds of ba tteries together — although they may look similar, different batteries may hav e different voltages. • Make sure that the plus and minus ends of each battery match the indicatio ns in the battery compartme nt. • Remove batteries from equ ipment that isn’t going to be used for a month or more . • When disposing of used batteries, please comply with governme ntal regulations or environmental public instruction’s rules th at ap ply in your country or area. Using the remote control Please keep in mind the following when using the remote control: • Make sure that there are n o obstacles between the remote and the remote sensor on the unit. • Remot e operat ion may bec ome unreliable if strong sunlight or fluorescen t light is shining on the unit’s remote sensor. • Remote contr ollers for different devices can interfere with each other. Avoid using remotes for other equipment located close to this unit. • Replace the batteries when you notice a fall off in the operating range of th e remote. • When the ba tteries run down or you change the batteries , the remote control mode is reset to Recorder 1 . See Remote Control Mo de on p age 118 . • Use within the operating range in front of the remote control sensor on the front panel, a s shown. W ARNING Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight or other excessively hot place, such as inside a car or near a heater . This can cause batteries to leak, overheat, explode or catch fire. It can also reduce the life or per formance of batteries. D3-4-2-3-3_En 7 m DVRLX70_TF_EN.bo ok 6 ページ ２００７年８月１ 日　水曜日　午 後４時１４分
Before you start 7 En 01 • You can con trol this recorder using the remote sen sor of another Pioneer component via th e CONTROL IN jack on the rear panel. See Rear panel connection s on page 14 for mo re information. Disc/content format playbac k compatibility Compatible media • DVD-RW ver. 1.1 / 1x / 1x to 2x, ver. 1.2 / 2x to 4x / 2x to 6x • DVD-R ver. 2.0 / 1x / 1x to 4x / 1x to 8x / 1x to 16x, ver. 2.1 / 1x to 8x / 1x to 16x • DVD RW 1x to 2.4x / 1x to 4x / 3.3x to 8x • DVD R 1x to 2.4x / 1x to 4x / 1x to 8x / 1x to 16x • DVD-RAM ver. 2.0 / 2x , ver. 2.1 / 2x / 2x to 3x / 2x to 5x, ver. 2.2 / 2x / 2x to 3x / 2x to 5x • DVD-R DL ver. 3.0 / 2x to 4x / 2x to 8x • DVD R DL 2.4x / 2.4x to 8x Note that older models of DVD recorders and DVD writers may reject DVD-RW ve r. 1.2 discs and/or corrupt the data on the disc. If you want to share DVD-RW discs between this recorder and an older recorder/writer, we recommend using ver. 1.1 discs. The following table shows o lder Pioneer DVD recorders’ limited comp atibility with DVD-RW ver. 1.2 discs. *1 Discs should be finalized in this recorder before playing. Unfinalized VR m ode and Vi deo mode discs may not pla y. *2 Cannot read the CPRM info rmation will show in the display when you load a disc. However, this will not affect playback. *3 Copy-once pr otected disc titles will not play . Readable file system This recorder can play DVDs recorded under the followi ng file systems 1 : ISO 9660*, UDF 1.02, UDF 1.50, UDF 2.00, UDF 2.01. * ISO 9660 Level 1 o r 2 compliant. Romeo and Joliet file systems are both compatib le with this recorder. Model Playable Recordable DVR-7000 Yes *1,2,3 No DVR- 310 DVR-510H Yes *1 No Note 1 • Depending on the recording technique used, even file s recorded in co mpatible file systems may not play correctly. • MP3/WMA/DivX files can be pla yed ba ck when recorded onto a DVD that co ntains no video titles and uses the UDF 1.02, UDF 1.50, UDF 2.01 or ISO 9660 file systems. DVRLX70_TF_EN.bo ok 7 ページ ２００７年８月１ 日　水曜日　午 後４時１４分
Before you start 01 8 En HDD/DVD Recording and playback compatibility This recorder can play and record all widely-u sed DVD disc types, and addit ionally provides HDD functionality. The table below shows some specific comp atibility differenc es between the different disc types . Notes to table *1 Must be initial ized for VR mode recording (page 103). *2 Must be initial ized for Video mode record ing (page 103). *3 Erasab le, but free space does not increase . *4 Cannot er ase sections, edit chapters or use playlist editing. *5 Must be compatible with DV D-R (VR) playbac k. *6 Finali ze using this recorder (may not playback in some units) (page 48). *7 Must be compatible with DVD-RW (VR) playback. *8 Must be compatible with DVD R W pl ayback. *9 Must be compatible with DVD-RAM pl ayback. *10 O nly when HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off (page 115). *11 Only when the recording mode i s not set to LPCM. *12 CPR M-compatible discs only. *13 Take the disc out of the cartridge before use. Only Panasonic and Maxell discs h a ve been tested to work reliably with this recorde r. Discs from other makers may become unus able when recorded or e dited. *14 Erasing a titl e does not in crease the availa ble recording time, nor incre ase the number of recordable titles left. *15 Mus t be compa tible with DVD R playback. *16 Depending on the disc, i t may have to be initi alized before it can be reco rded (page 103). In this case, initialization wil l take about an hour. is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Cor poration. HDD DVD-R DVD-RW DVD R DVD RW DVD -RAM Marks used in this manua l *1 *1 *2 *13, 16 Logos Re-recordable/ Erasab le  *3 *3   *3  *14  Editing of recorded programmes    *4   *4  *4  *4  Re co rding of Copy- once prote cted material   *12  *12  *12 Playback in other players/recorders n/a *5  *6 *7  *6  *6, 15  *8  *9 Chase play  16:9 and 4:3 programme recording     Dual mono/ Bilingual br oadcast recording of both audio cha nnels  *10, 11  *11  *11  *11 HDD DVD ( VR) DVD (V ideo) DVD ( VR) DVD ( Video) DVD R DVD RW DVD-RAM DVRLX70_TF_EN.bo ok 8 ページ ２００７年８月１ 日　水曜日　午 後４時１４分
Before you start 9 En 01 Using DVD-R DL/DVD R DL discs DVD-R DL (Dual-Laye r) and DVD R DL (Double-Layer) discs contain two recordable layers on a single side, giving abou t 1.8 times the recording capacity of a conventional single-lay er disc. This unit can record to both DVD-R DL and DVD R DL discs. • If yo u intend to pl ay DVD-R DL (V ideo mode) or DVD R DL discs recorded on this unit on other DVD rec orders/players, you must finalize them. (Note that some DVD recorders/players may not play even finalized DL discs.) • This logo indicat es that the disc is a DVD-R DL or DVD R DL di sc: Correct operation has been confirmed for D L discs: • DVD-R DL ver. 3.0 /2x to 4x Mitsubishi Kagaku Media (Verbat im) • DVD-R DL ver. 3.0 /2x to 8x Mitsubishi Kagaku Media (Verbat im) That’s JVC • DVD R DL 2.4x Mitsubishi Kagaku Media (Verbat im) RICOH • DVD R DL 2.4x to 8x Mitsubishi Kagaku Media (Verbat im) RICOH About DualDisc play back A DualDisc is a new two -sided disc, one side of which c ontains DVD cont ent – video, audio, etc. – while the other side contains non-DVD content such as digital audio material. The non-DVD, audio side of the disc is not compliant with the CD audio specific ation and therefore ma y not play. It is possible that when lo ading or ejecting a DualDisc, the opposite side to that being played will be scrat ched. Scratched discs may not be playable. The DVD side of a DualDisc plays in this product. DVD-Audio content will not play. For more detaile d information on the DualDisc specification, please refer to the disc manufacturer or disc retailer. Other disc compatibility In addition to DVD, this recorder is compatible with a wide range of disc types (media) and formats. Playable di scs will generally feature one o f the logos on the disc and/or disc packaging shown below. Note however that some disc types, such as recordable CD (and DVD), may be in an unplayable fo rmat — see below for further compatib ility informat ion. CD-R/-RW compatibility This recorder cannot record CD -R or CD-RW discs. • Readabl e formats: CD a udio, Video CD/ Super VCD, ISO 9660 CD-ROM* containing MP3, WMA, JPEG o r DivX files * ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2 com pliant. CD physical format: Mo de1, Mode2 XA Form1. Romeo and Joliet file sy stems are both compatible with this recorder. • Multi-session playback: Yes (except CD audio and Video CD/Super VCD) • Unfinalized disc playback: CD audio only Compressed audio compatibility • Compatible media: DVD-ROM, DVD-R/-RW, DVD R/ RW, DVD-RA M, CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, USB • Compatible formats: MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3 (MP3), Windows Media A udio (WMA) Video CD Audio CD CD-R CD-RW Super Video CD (Super VCD) DVRLX70_TF_EN.bo ok 9 ページ ２００７年８月１ 日　水曜日　午 後４時１４分
Before you start 01 10 En • Sampling rates: 3 2 kHz, 44.1 kHz or 48 k Hz • Bit-rates: Any (128 kbps or higher recommended) • Variable bit- rate (VBR) MP3 playback: Yes • VBR WMA playback: No • WMA enc oder compatibilit y: Windows Media Cod ec 8 (files encoded using Windows Med ia Codec 9 may be pl ayable but some parts o f the specification are not supported; sp ecifically, Pro, Loss less, Voice and VBR) • DRM (Digital Rig hts Management) 1 file playback: N o • File extensions: .mp 3, .wma (these must be used for the recorder to recognize MP3 and WMA files – do not use for other f ile types) • File structure: The recorder can load up to 99 folders/999 files at one time (if there are more fi les/folders th at this on the disc then more can be reloaded) WMA (Windows Media™ Audio) content This recorder can playback Windows Media Audio content. WMA is an acr onym for Windows Medi a Audio and refers to an audio compression technology developed by Microsoft Corpor ation. Windows Media is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation. This product i ncludes technology owned by Microsoft Corporation and cannot b e used or distributed wi thout a license from Mic rosoft Licensin g, Inc. DivX video compatibility DivX is a compressed digital video format created by the DivX ® video cod ec from DivX, Inc. Keeping the same termino logy as DVD-Video, individual D ivX video files are called “Tit les”. When naming fi les/titles on a disc prior to burnin g, keep in mind that by default they will be played in alphabetica l order. • Official DivX ® Certified prod uct. • Plays all versions of DivX ® video (includi ng DivX ® 6) with standard playback of DivX ® media files. • File extensions: .avi and .divx (these must be used for the recorder to recognize DivX video file s). Note that all files with the .avi ex tension are recogni zed as MPEG4, but not all of these are necessarily Di vX video files and therefore may not be play able on this recorder. • File structure: Up to 99 folders or 999 files. DivX, Div X Certified, an d associated logos are trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used und er license. DivX ® VOD content In order to p lay DivX VOD (video on demand) content on this recorder, you first need to register the recorder with your D ivX VOD content provider. You do this by generating a DivX VOD registration code, which you submit to your provider. Note 1 DRM (digital rights management) copy protection is a technology designed to prevent unauthorized copying by restricting playback, etc. of compressed audio file s on de vices other than the PC (or other recording equip m ent) used to record it. For detailed inform ation, please see the instruction manuals o r h el p fi l es th a t c am e wi th y ou r PC and/or software. DivX DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 10 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Before you start 11 En 01 Some DivX VOD conten t may only be playable a fixed number of times. When you load a disc contain ing this type of DivX VOD content, the remaining num ber of plays is shown on-screen and you then have the option of playing the disc (thereby using up one of the remain ing plays), or stopping. If you load a disc tha t contains expired DivX VOD content (for exam ple, content that has zero remaining plays), the message Rental Expired is displa yed. If your DivX VOD content allows an unlimited number of plays, then you may load the disc into your recorder and play the content as often as you like, and no message will be displayed . Important • DivX VOD content is protec ted by a DRM system. This restricts playback of content to specific, r egistered devices. • If you load a disc th at contains DivX VOD content not authoriz ed for this re corder, the message Authorization Error is displayed and the content will not pla y. • Resetting the recorder (as describe d in Resetting the recorder on page 136) will not cause you to lose your registratio n code. JPEG file compatibility • Compatible formats: Ba seline JPEG and EXIF 2.2* stil l image files * File f ormat used by digi tal still cameras • Sampling ratio: 4:4 :4, 4:2:2, 4:2:0 • Horizontal resolu tion: 160 to 5120 pixels • Vertical reso lution: 120 to 3840 pixels • Progressive JPEG co mpatible: No • File extensions: .jpg, .j peg, .jpe, .jif, .jfif (must be used for the recorder to recognize J PEG files – do not use fo r other f ile types) • File structure: The recorder can load up to 99 folders/999 files at one time (if there are more fi les/folders th at this on the disc then more can be reloaded) PC-created disc compatibility Discs recorded using a personal com puter may not b e playable in t his unit due to the setting of the application software used to create the disc. In these pa rticular instances, check with the software publ isher for more detailed inform ation. Discs recorded in pack et write mode (UDF format) are not c ompatible with this recorder. Check the DVD-R/-RW or CD-R/-RW software disc boxes for addit ional compatib ility informat ion. Dolby Digital Manufactured under licen se from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby” and the double-D symbol are tradem arks of Dolby Laboratories. DTS “DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are regis tered trademarks of DTS, Inc. DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 11 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Before you start 01 12 En About the internal hard disk drive The internal ha rd disk drive (HDD) is a fragile piece of equipment. W hen used without the proper care o r in the wron g conditions , it is possible that recorded co ntents may be damaged or lost entirely, in some cases making even norma l playback or recording impossible. Please understand that in the event of repair or replace ment of the HDD or related components, a ll your HDD recordings will be lost. Please use the recorder following the guidelines below to pr otect against possible HDD fa ilure. The HDD should not be regard ed as a place to store recordings permanently. We recommend that you back up your important recordings onto DVD disc s in order to protect against accidental loss. Pioneer cannot under any circumstances accept responsibility for any direct or indirect loss arising from any in convenience or loss of recorded material resu lting from HDD fail ure. • Install and use th e recorder on a stable, level surface. • Do not block the rear vent/coolin g fan. • Do not use the recorder in excessively hot or humid place s, or in places that may be subject to sudden changes in temperature. Sudden changes in temperature can cause condensa tion to form inside th e recorder. This can be a cause of HDD failure. • Do not move the recorder immediately after switching it off. If you need to move the recorder, please follow the steps below: 1 After the message POWER OFF is shown on the front panel display, wai t at least two minutes. 2 Unplug from the wall socket. 3 Move the reco rder. • If there’s a power fa ilure while the recorder is o n there is a chance that some data on the HDD will be lost. • The HDD is very delica te. If used over time in an improp er manner or in an unsuitable environment, it is p ossible that the H DD will fail. Signs o f problems include playback unexpectedly freez ing and notic eable block noi se (mosaic) in the picture. However, sometimes there will be no warning signs of HDD failure. If the HDD fails, no pla yback of recorded material will be possible. In this case i t will be necessary to replace the HDD unit. Optimizing HDD perfor mance As you reco rd and edit material on the HDD, the data on the disk becomes fragmented, eventually affecting the recorder’s performance. Before this happens, the recorder will warn you th at it is tim e to optimize the HDD (which you c an do from the Disc Setup menu; see Optimize HDD on page 103). DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 12 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Before you start 13 En 01 Symbols used in this manual The following icons are provided to help yo u quickly identify which instructions you need for whic h kind of disc. HDD Any typ e of DVD disc (recordable or playback only), fin alized or not. Commercially produced DVD, finalized Video mode DVD-R/ -RW. Video mode DVD-R/-RW (unfinalized) VR mode DVD-R/-RW DVD R DVD RW DVD-RA M Audio C D Video CD Super VCD WMA or MP3 files DivX f iles All of the above HDD DVD DVD-Video DVD ( Video) DVD ( VR) DVD R DVD RW DVD-RAM CD Video CD Super VCD WMA/MP3 DivX ALL DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 13 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Connections 02 14 En Chapter 2 Connections Rear panel connections 1 ANTENNA IN (RF IN)/OUT Connect your TV antenna to the ANTENNA IN (RF IN) jack. The sig nal is passed th rough to the ANTENNA O UT jack fo r connection to your TV. 2 INPUT 3 Stereo analog au dio, video and S-Video inputs for connection to a satellite receiver , set top box, etc. 3 COMPONENT VIDEO OUT A high-quality video outp ut for connecting to a TV or monitor with a component video input. 4H D M I O U T HDMI output for high quality digital audio and video. 5 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT ( COAXIAL) Coaxia l digital audi o jack for connec ting to an AV amplifier/receiver, D olby Digital/DTS decoder or other equipment with a digital input. 6 INPUT 1/AUTO START REC Stereo analog au dio, video and S-Video inputs for connection to a satellite receiver , set top box, etc. 7O U T P U T 1 Stereo analog audio, vi deo and S-Video outputs for co nnection to a TV or AV amplifier/receive r. 8O U T P U T 2 Stereo analog audio, vi deo and S-Video outputs for co nnection to a TV or AV amplifier/receive r. 9 CONTROL IN Use to control this rec order from the remote sensor of a nother Pioneer compon ent with a CONTROL OUT terminal and bearin g the Pioneer  mark . Connect the CO NTROL OUT of the oth er componen t to the CONTROL IN of this recorder using a mini- plug cor d. 10 AC IN – Power inlet Connect to a power outlet usin g the supplied power cable after makin g all other connections. AC IN DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL HDMI OUT CONTROL IN S-VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO L R ANTENNA IN OUT INPUT 1 / AUTO ST ART REC INPUT 3 S-VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO L R Y P B P R COMPONENT VIDEO OUT OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 3 4 5 2 6 7 8 9 10 1 DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 14 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Connections 15 En 02 Front panel connections On the front pan el there is a flip-down cover that hide s more connectio ns. Left side: 11 DV IN A DV input i.LINK co nnector, suitable for connecti ng a DV camcor der. 12 USB port (Type B) USB port for connecting a PictBridge- compatible pri nter or PC. 13 USB port (Type A) USB port for connecting a digital came ra, keyboard or other USB device. Right side: 14 INPUT 2 Audio/video inpu t (stereo analog audio; composite a nd S-Video), esp ecially suitable for camcorders, game consoles, portable audio, et c. USB DV IN 11 12 13 INPUT 2 VIDEO S-VIDEO L(MONO) R AUDIO 14 DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 15 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Connections 02 16 En Easy connections The setup described here is a basic configuration th at allows you to record TV programmes on both this recorder and your VCR. When watching reco rdings from this recorder, set your TV to inpu t 1; switch to input 2 to watch a video playi ng in the VCR. Important • This recorder is equipped with copy protection techno logy. Do not connect this recorder to your TV via a VCR (or your VCR via this recorder) using AV cables, as the picture from th is recorder will not appear pro perly on your TV. • Befo re making o r changing an y rear panel connections, make sure that all components are switched off and unplugged from the wall outlet. 1 Connect your TV antenna/cable TV outlet to the ANTENN A IN (RF IN) jack on this recorder. 2 Use an RF antenna c able (one is supplied) to connec t the ANTENNA OUT jack on this recorde r to the antenna input on you r VCR. • If you are not connecting a VCR in the chain, connec t this recorder directly to your TV and sk ip the next step. 3 Use an RF antenna ca ble to connect the antenna outp ut on your VCR to the antenna in put on your TV. 4 Connect the AUDIO and VIDEO OUTPUT jacks (1 or 2) to a set of au dio/ video inp uts on your TV. Use the supplied three-pin audio/video cable. It is colour-c oded to help you match them up (red/white fo r th e right/left audio connections and yellow for video i n/outs). Make sure you match up the left and right outputs with their corresponding inputs for correct ster eo sound. 5 Connect your VCR to yo ur TV (A/V IN 2 above) using a set of au dio and video cables. • See the following pa ge if you want to use S-Video or compo nent video cables for the video connection. AC IN DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL HDMI OUT CONTROL IN S-VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO L R ANTENNA IN OUT INPUT 1 / AUTO START REC INPUT 3 S-VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO L R Y P B P R COMPONENT VIDEO OUT OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 TV Antenna/cable T V wall outlet VCR ANTENNA IN (RF IN) ANTENNA OUT 1 2 OUTPUT 1 3 5 4 T o antenna input T o antenna input From antenna output T o audio/ video input T o audio/ video input From audio/ video output DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 16 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Connections 17 En 02 Using other types of video output This r ecorder has standard (composi te), S-Video an d component video output s. The main difference between them is the quality of the picture. S-Vi deo delivers a better picture than compo site video, while component video gives better picture quality still. The variety of ou tputs also gives you the flexibility of connecting your pa rticular equipment using the best conn ection type availa ble. 1 Connectin g using an S-Video output S-Video carrie s the picture as separate colour and luminance (brightness) signals. There are two S-Video outputs for connection to TVs, monitors, VCRs or o ther equipment. • U se an S -Video cable (not suppl ied) to connect an S-VI DEO OUTPUT (1 o r 2) to an S-Video input on your TV, m onitor (or other equi pment). 2 Connecting usi ng the component video output. Component video carries the pictu re as two separate colour signals, plus a luminance (brightness) signal. See also Component Video Out on page 110 for how to set up the component video output for use with a progressive scan- compatible T V. • Use a com ponent video cable (not supplied) to conn ect th e COMPONEN T VIDEO OUT jacks to a component vi deo input on your TV, monitor (or other equipment). TV AC IN DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL HDMI OUT CONTROL IN S-VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO L R ANTENNA IN OUT INPUT 1 / AUTO START REC INPUT 3 S-VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO L R Y P B P R COMPONENT VIDEO OUT OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 COMPONENT VIDEO OUT 1 2 T o component video input T o S-Video input S-VIDEO OUTPUT DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 17 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Connections 02 18 En Connecting to a cable box or satellite receiver (1) If you are using a ca ble box or satellite r e c e i v e r w i t h o n l y a few scrambled channels, follow the setup on this page 1 . If many or all the channels are scrambled, we recom mend using the setup on the foll owing page. Using the setup o n this page yo u can: • Record unscrambled channels by selectin g them on this rec order. • Record s crambled ch annels by se lecting them on th e cable box/satellite receiver and using the Auto Start Recording feature (see Automatic recording from a sate llite tu ner on page 47 ). • Watch one channel while r ecording anoth er. Important • Do not co nnect this recorder ‘through’ your VCR, satellite receiver or ca ble box. Always connect each component directly to your TV or AV amp lifier/ receiver. 1 Connect RF anten na cables as shown. This enables you to watch a nd record TV channel s. 2 Connect the AUDIO and VIDEO OUTPUT jacks (1 or 2) on this recorder to a set of au dio/video inputs on your TV using a s et of A/V cables (as supplied). This enables you to watch the outpu t from this recorder. 3 Connect the audio/video outp ut of your cable box/satell i te receiver to the INPUT 1 jacks on this recorder using a set of A/V cables. This enables you to record scrambled TV channel s. Note 1 T he diagram shows standard video connections, b ut yo u ca n alternatively use the S-Video or comp onent video connections if they’re available. AC IN DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL HDMI OUT CONTROL IN S-VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO L R ANTENNA IN OUT INPUT 1 / AUTO START REC INPUT 3 S-VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO L R Y P B P R COMPONENT VIDEO OUT OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 TV Antenna/cable T V wall outlet Cable box/ Satellite receiver ANTENNA OUT 1 1 OUTPUT 1 INPUT 1/AUT O ST ART REC 1 2 3 T o antenna input T o antenna input From antenna output T o audio/ video input From audio/ video output ANTENNA IN (RF IN) DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 18 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Connections 19 En 02 Connecting to a cable box or satellite receiver (2) If many or all th e channels you receiv e by cable or satellite are scrambled, we recommend using this setup. 1 Using the setup o n this page yo u can: • Record any channel by selecting it on the cable box/satellite receiver. • Record using the Auto Star t Recording feature (see Automatic recording from a sate llite tu ner on page 47 ). Important • Do not co nnect this recorder ‘through’ your VCR, satellite receiver or ca ble box. Always connect each component directly to your TV or AV amp lifier/ receiver. 1 Connect RF anten na cables as shown. This enables you to watch a nd record TV channel s. 2 Connect the AUDIO and VIDEO OUTPUT jacks (1 or 2) on this recorder to a set of au dio/video inputs on your TV using a s et of A/V cables (as supplied). This enables you to watch discs. 3 Connect the audio/video outp ut of your cable box/satell i te receiver to the INPUT 1 jacks on this recorder using a set of A/V cables. This enables you to record scrambled TV channel s. Note 1 • The setup on this page does not allow you to watch one channel and record another. • The diagram shows standard video connections, but you c an alternatively use the S-Video or component video connections if they’re available. AC IN DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL HDMI OUT CONTROL IN S-VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO L R ANTENNA IN OUT INPUT 1 / AUTO START REC INPUT 3 S-VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO L R Y P B P R COMPONENT VIDEO OUT OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 TV Antenna/cable T V wall outlet Cable box/ Satellite receiver ANTENNA OUT 1 1 OUTPUT 1 INPUT 1/AUT O ST ART REC 2 3 T o antenna input T o antenna input From antenna output T o audio/ video input From audio/ video output ANTENNA IN (RF IN) DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 19 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Connections 02 20 En Connecting to an AV amplifier or receiver To enjoy multichanne l surround sound you need to co nnect this recorder to an AV amplifier/receiver using the digi tal coaxial output. In addition to the dig ital connect ion, we recommend also c onnecting using th e stereo analog connection. You ’ll pro bably a lso wa nt to c onnec t a vi deo output to your AV amplifier /receiver. Use the standard (composite) video out put (as shown here), or the S-Video or component video connections. See also Audio Out on page 111 for how to set up the digital audio output. (Noise may be output from your speakers if the r ecorder is not set up to work with your AV amplifier/ receiver.) Important • Do not co nnect this recorder to your TV ‘through’ your VCR or other component using A/V ca bles. Always connect it directly to your TV. 1 Connect RF anten na cables as shown. This enables you to watch a nd record TV channel s. 2 Connect the AUDIO and VIDEO OUTPUT jacks (1 or 2) on this recorder to a set of au dio/video in puts on your AV amplifier/re ceiver. 3 Use an coaxi al digital audio cab le (not supplied) to connec t the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (COAXI AL) jack on this recorder to an coaxial d igital input on yo ur AV amplifier/re ceiver. This enables you to listen to m ultichannel surround sound. 1 4 Connect the AV am plifier/receiver’s video outpu t to a video inpu t on your TV. Note 1 If your AV amp lifier/receiver doe sn’t have an coaxial di gital input, but has a optical type, converte r boxes that convert from coaxial to optical are available at specialist audio dealers. AC IN DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL HDMI OUT CONTROL IN S-VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO L R ANTENNA IN OUT INPUT 1 / AUTO START REC INPUT 3 S-VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO L R Y P B P R COMPONENT VIDEO OUT OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 TV Antenna/cable T V wall outlet AV amplifier/receiv er ANTENNA IN (RF IN) ANTENNA OUT 1 1 OUTPUT 1 3 DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT 2 4 T o audio/video input To antenna input T o video input T o digital input From video output DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 20 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Connections 21 En 02 Connecting using HDMI If you have an HD MI or DVI-equipped 1 monitor or display 2 , you can co nnect it to this recorder using an HDMI cable 3 (not supplied). The HDMI connector outputs uncom pressed digital video, as well a s almost every kind of digital audio. 1 Use an HDMI cable to connect the HDMI OUT connector on this re corder to an HDMI connector on an HDMI- compatible display. • The arrow on t he cable conne ctor body should be face down for correct alignment with th e connector on the recor der. When connected to an HDMI component or HDCP-compatible DVI com ponent, the HDMI indicator lights. HDMI setup is generally automatic. There are however settings you ca n change if you need to. See HDMI Output (only available when an HDMI device is connected ) on page 116 for more information. Note that the HDMI settings remain in effect until you change th em, or connect a ne w HDMI component . Important • An HDMI co nnection can only be made with DVI-equipped components compatib le with both D VI and High-b andwidth Digit al Content Protection (HDCP). If you cho ose to connect to a DVI co nnector, you will need a DVI to HDMI adaptor cable. A DVI to HDCP connection , however, does not support audio. Consul t your local audio dealer for more informa tion. • The HDMI connection is compatible with 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz , 96 kHz, 16 bit/ 20 bit/24 bit 2-channel linear PCM signals, as well as Dolby Digital, D TS and MPEG audio bitstream. • If your conne cted component is only compatible with Linear PCM, the signal is output as Lin ear PCM (DTS audio i s not output). • If you have co nnected to a Pioneer plasma display, please select the HDMI setup on the display (refer to the supplied manual for m ore on this). About HDMI HDMI (High-Defini tion Multimedia Interface) supports bo th video and audio on a single d igital con nection for use w ith DVD players and recorders, DTV, set-top boxes, and other AV devices. HDMI was developed to provide the technolo gies of High-bandwidth Digi tal Content Protection (HDCP) as well as Digital Visu al Interface (DVI) in one specif ication. HDC P is used to protect digital content transmitted and received by D VI-compliant disp lays. Note 1 Depending on the component you have connected, us ing a DVI connection may resu lt in unreliable signal transfers. 2 T he pixel resolution of this record er’s HDMI video output is (a ccording to TV format): NTSC (720 x 480i/p, 1280 x 720p, 1920 x 1080i/p) and PA L (720 x 576i/p, 1280 x 720p, 192 0 x 1080 i/p). If your display is not compatible with these resolutions the picture m ay not be correctly reproduced. 3 We recommen d you use an HDMI cable that supports HDMI category 2. AC IN DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL HDMI OUT CONTROL IN S-VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO L R ANTENNA IN OUT INPUT 1 / AUTO START REC INPUT 3 S-VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO L R Y P B P R COMPONENT VIDEO OUT OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 HDMI OUT T o HDMI input HDMI-compatible display DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 21 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Connections 02 22 En HDMI h as the capabili ty to support standard, enhanced, or high-definition video plus standard to multi-c hannel surround- sound audio. HD MI features include uncompressed digit a l video, a bandwid th of up to five gigabits per second (Dual Link), one connector (instead of several cables and connectors), and communication between the AV source and A V devices such as DTVs. HDMI, the HDM I logo and High-Defin ition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered t rademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. HDMI Co ntrol By connecting this un it to an HDMI Control- compatible Pioneer plasma tele vision, AV system (amplifier or AV receiver etc.) with an HDMI cable, you can control this unit from the remote control of a connected plasma television, as well as have the connected plasma television automatically chan ge inputs i n response to this unit s tarting playbac k. Refer to the operating instruction s for your plasma television or AV system for more information about which o perations can be carried out by connecting via HDMI cable. Auto-select function You can have a connected plasma te levision or AV system automatically chan ge inputs when playback begins on this unit (includi ng when you have a G UI (such as Disc Naviga tor) set to display on t his unit). Certain connected pla sma televisions may have their power turned from o ff to on when using this function. Simultaneous power function You can have this unit turn on automatically when the power for a conne cted plasma televisio n is turned on. To have this un it’s power turned off when a connected plasma t e l e v i s i o n i s t u r n e d o f f , y o u m u s t c h a n g e t h e simultaneous power function of your plasma televisi on. Unified language function By receiving l anguage infor mation from a connected plasma television, you can have this unit ’s language settings a utomatica lly change to th ose of the plasma television (language information can be received on ly when no media is bein g played back an d no recordings are taking place, or when you choose not to displa y this unit’s GU I displays). Important • Depending on th e type of plasma television, some HDMI input terminals do not support th e HDMI Control function. For details, see the ope rating instructions supplied with your plasma television. • To use the following functions, set this unit’ s HDMI Control to Off (page 11 7). – When you use Auto Sta rt Recording (page 47). – When you want th is unit to automa tically switch off upo n completion o f timer recording. (W hen HDMI Control is set to On , this unit does not auto matically switch off if your plasma television i s switched on upon completion o f timer recording.) – When using the Video Contro l function of an external com ponent. – Child lo ck settings (page 45). • HDMI Control ma y not operate properly if you do not use an HDM I cable that supports the HDMI 1.3 Specification . • Controls may not func tion properly in certain situations, such as immediatel y after you have connect an HDMI cable, turn this unit’s po wer off or remove the power cable for th is unit or the connected component. If you experience any problem s, set HDMI Control to On for all connected unit s, and then di splay the pictures stored on this unit on your plasma television to impro ve the situations . • We cannot guarantee this un it will work with HD MI Control-co mpatible components other than those made by Pioneer. DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 22 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Connections 23 En 02 Connecting other AV sources Connecting a VCR or analog camcorder 1 Connect a set of audio and video inputs of your VCR or c amcorder to a set of outputs on this rec order. This enables you to record from this recorder to your VCR or cam corder. • You can use standard video or S-Video cables for the video connection. 2 Connect a set of audio and video outputs of your VCR or camcor der to a set of inputs on this recorder. This enab les you to re cord tapes from yo ur VCR or camcorder. • You can use standard video or S-Video cables for the video connection. • The front p anel connections ma ke convenient connections for a camco rder input. • When connectin g an external AV source that only supports monaura l sound, only insert the left (white) audio jack to this device. Doing so will allow the same sound track to be recorded to both channels. You must co nnect to the INPUT 2 jack on the front pan el. Connecting a DV camcorder You can conn ect a DV camcorder or DVD recorder with DV outp ut to the front panel DV IN jack. Important • This jack is for con nection to DV equipment only. It is no t compatible with digital satellite receivers or D- VHS video decks. • Use a DV cab le (not supplied) to connect th e DV jack of y our DV camcorder to the fro nt pa nel DV IN jack of this recorder. Connecting a USB device Using t he USB ports on the front of the recorder you can connect USB devices such as digital cameras, prin ters, keyboards and PCs. Please also see the instructions that came with the device you want to con nect before using. Analog camcorder VCR HDD/DVD DivX COPY HDMI OPEN/CLOSE STANDBY/ON USB DV IN CH INPUT SELECT STOP REC ONE TOUCH COPY REC MODE INPUT 2 VIDEO S-VIDEO L ( MONO ) RA U D I O REC (Rear panel) AUDIO/VIDEO OUTPUT AUDIO/VIDEO INPUT (Front panel) 1 2 From audio/ video output T o audio/ video input DV camcorder HDD/DVD DivX COPY HDMI OPEN/CLOSE STANDBY/ON USB DV IN CH INPUT SELECT STOP REC ONE TOUCH COPY REC MODE INPUT 2 VIDEO S-VIDEO L ( MONO ) RA U D I O REC From DV output DV IN Digital Camera Keyboard HDD/DVD DivX COPY HDMI OPEN/CLOSE STANDBY/ON USB DV IN CH INPUT SELECT STOP REC ONE TOUCH COPY REC MODE INPUT 2 VIDEO S-VIDEO L ( MONO ) RA U D I O REC PictBridge-compatible Printer USB USB USB ( Type A) USB ( Type B) PC DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 23 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Connections 02 24 En Important • Some USB devices may no t work with this recorder. • When connecting a PC to this unit, make sure the power is turned off o n both the PC and this unit when you con nect them via USB. • We recommend connecting USB devices when this recorder is switched off (in standby). JPEG file st orage devices • Digital still camera • Memory card reader (any type of m emory card) •U S B m e m o r y The Mass Storage Class (MSC) device should be FAT-com patible. Note that if the device is partitio ned, this recorder may not recognize it. The Picture Transfe r Protocol (PTP) can be used to transfer up to a ma ximum of 4000 files. WMA/MP3 file stor age devices • Memory card reader (any type of m emory card) •U S B m e m o r y • PC (Use Connect PC function) The Mass Storage Class (MSC) device should be FAT-com patible. Note that if the device is partitio ned, this recorder may not recognize it. Note that although multi-sl ot card readers can be used, the recorder will only recognize the first card inserted. To read another card, remove all the cards an d insert the card to be read again. Using a US B hub • Use a hub co mpatible with USB 1.1 and/ or 2.0. • Use an independen tly powered hub (bus powered hubs may not work reliably). • In the event o f unreliable operation with the hub, we recommend plugging the device directly into the recorder’s USB port. • Operation may become unreliable if too many devices are connecte d to the hub. In this case, try u nplugging some devices. • If the power delivered through a hub is insuffic ient for the dev ices connected , communication ca n become unreliable. In this case, disc onnect one or more devices then perform a USB restart. (See Restart USB Devi ce on page 118 .) Using a USB printer • Use a PictBridge-compatible printer. Using a USB key board • Do not use a P S/2 keyboard connected using a PS/2-USB adapter. Using a PC • Note that you can connect a PC to this device via USB to copy WMA and MP3 files. For more informatio n, see Connect PC on page 88. To use C onnect PC with this device, your PC must run either the Windows X P Home Editio n (SP2), Windows XP Professional (SP2) or Windows Vista Home Premium operating system and be able to run Windows Media Player 11. Even if your PC can run W indows Media Player 11, we cannot guarantee that it will functio n properly with this device. For more details see the ‘Help’ section of Windows Media Player 11. Plugging in After checking all the connections, plug in the recorder. • U se the suppl ied power cable to connect this recorder to a power outlet. DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 24 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Controls and displays 25 En 03 Chapter 3 Controls and displays Front panel 1 DivX in dicator Lights when this reco rder plays DivX video files. 2 HDD/DVD Press to switch between HDD and DVD for recording and play back. 3C O P Y i n d i c a t o r Lights when copying is underwa y. 4 Disc tray 5 HDD/DVD indicator Indicator lights blue when the hard disk (HDD) is selected; orange when the DVD drive is selected. 6  OPEN /CLOSE Press to open/close the disc tray. 7H D M I i n d i c a t o r Lights when this recorder is connected to HDMI (HDCP) co mpatible component . 8 Front panel di splay and IR remote sensor See Display on page 26 for details. 9  STANDBY/ON Press to switch the recorder on/into standby. 10 Front panel in puts See Front panel connections on page 15 for more information o n these. 11  Press to start or restart playback.  Press to stop playback. F STOP REC Press to stop recording. ONE TOUCH COPY Press to start One Touch Copy of the currently playing title to DVD or t he HDD. CH /– Use to change channels, skip c hapters/ tracks, etc. INPUT SELECT Press to change the input used fo r recording. REC MODE Press repeatedly to cycle throu gh recording modes (pic ture quality). 12  REC Press to start recording. Press repeatedly to set the rec ording time i n 30 minute block s. HDD/DVD DivX COPY HDMI OPEN/CLOSE STANDBY/ON USB DV IN CH INPUT SELECT STOP REC ONE TOUCH COPY REC MODE INPUT 2 VIDEO S-VIDEO L ( MONO ) RA U D I O REC 8 4 6 1 7 3 2 5 12 10 9 10 11 DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 25 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Controls and displays 03 26 En Display 1  Lights during playback; blin ks when playback is p aused. 2  Lights when copying. 3  Lights during record ing; blinks when recording is paused. 4P M Lights to indicate PM (after m idday) for the clock display. 5 (page 38) Lights when a timer record ing has been set. (Indicator blinks if the timer has been set to DVD b ut there isn’t a recordable disc loaded, or the timer has been set to HDD but the HDD is not recordable.) NTSC Lights when the video output signal format i s NTSC. (page 111) Taiwan and Philippi nes model: Indicates whic h channels are recorde d when dual mono is sele cted. Othe r: Indicates whic h channels of a bilingual broadcast are recorded. (page 110) Lights when the component video output is set to progressi ve scan (excep t in some cases when a component is connected using HDMI). SAP (page 35) (Taiwan and Philippines model only) Lights when the currently selected TV channel has a Secondary Audio Progr amme channe l. 6 Recording quality indicators (page 36) XP Lights when the recording mode is set to XP (best quality). SP Lights when the recording mode is set to SP (standard play). LP/SLP Lights when the recording mode is set to LP (long play) or SLP (supe r-long play). EP/SEP Lights when the recording mode is set to EP (extended play) or SEP (super- extended pla y). MN Lights when the recording mode is set to MN (manual recor ding level) mode. 7 Character display 8R / R W Indicates the type of recordable DVD loaded: DVD-R or DVD-RW. 9A U T O Lights when Auto Start Recording has been set, and d uring Auto Start Rec ording. 10 PL (page 68) Lights when a VR mode disc is loaded and the recorder is in Play List mode. 2 3 (page 118) Shows the remote cont rol mode (i f nothing is displayed, the remote control mode is 1). V Lights when an unfinalized Vi deo mode disc is loaded. P R L 8 9 7 2 3 5 6 1 10 PM 4 DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 26 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Controls and displays 27 En 03 Remote control 1 ONE TOUCH COPY (pa ge 79) Press to start One T ouch Copy of th e currently playing title to DVD or the HDD. 2 Remote co ntrol indicator Lights when setting up the remote control for use with a TV (page 132) and when setting the remote control mode (page 118). 3  STANDBY/ON Press to switch the recorder on/into standby. 4  OPEN /CLOSE Press to open/close the disc tray. 5 HDD Press to select t he hard disk (HDD) fo r recording or playback. 6D V D Press to select the DVD for recording or playbac k. 7 INPUT SELECT (page 46) Press to change the input to use for recording. 8 Alphanu meric buttons, and CLEAR Use the number buttons for track/chapter/ title select ion; channel sel ection, and s o on. The s ame bu ttons c an als o be u sed to e nter names for titles, discs and so on. Use the button to enter non-alphanumeric characte rs and symbols. Use CLEAR to cl ear an entry and star t again. 9C H / – (page 3 5) Press to change the channel of the bui lt-in TV tuner. 10 G- Code™ (page 40) Press then use the number buttons to enter a G-Code programming num ber for timer recording. G-Code is a tradem ark of Gemstar Development Cor poration. The G-Code system is manuf actured under licen se from Gemstar Devel opment Corporation. 11 DVD playback fu nctions AUDIO (page 35, 61) Changes the audio language or c hannel. (When the recorder is stopped, press to change the tuner audio.) SUBTITLE (page 60) Press to display/change the subtitles included in multilingual DVD- Video discs. ANGLE (page 62) Press to switch camera angles on discs with multi-angle scenes. 12 PLAY MODE (page 58) Press to display the Pl a y M o d e m e n u ( f o r features such as search, re peat and programme play) . HDD/DVD RECORDER STANDBY/ON ONE TOUCH COPY OPEN/CLOSE TOP MENU RETURN DISC NAVIGA TOR MENU HOME MENU CASE SELECTION INPUT SELECT INPUT SELECT ABC AUDIO HDD DVD SUBTITLE ANGLE PLAY MODE HELP DISPLAY DEF GHI JKL MNO PQRS TUV WXYZ CLEAR ENTER CLEAR TV CONTROL CH CHANNEL VOLUME REC PREV PA USE STOP CM OK BACK SKIP REV SCAN PLAY FWD SCAN NEXT STEP/SLOW STOP REC REC MODE TIMER REC G -CODE 1 2 4 12 9 14 17 3 5 13 15 16 20 21 22 11 6 7 18 19 8 10 DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 27 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Controls and displays 03 28 En 13 DISC NAVIGATOR (page 55, 68) / TOP MENU (page 52) Press to display the Disc Na vigator screen, or the to p menu if a DVD-Vid eo or finaliz ed DVD-R/-RW (Video) disc is loaded. 14 MENU (page 52) Press to display the disc menu if a D VD- Video disc is loaded. 15 ///  and ENTER Used to navigate all on-screen displays. Press EN TER to s elect the current ly highlighted opti on. 16 HOME MENU Press to display the Home M enu, from which you can navigate all the functions of the recorder. 17 RETURN Press to go back one level in the on-scr een menu or display. 18 HELP Press for help on ho w to use the current GUI screen. 19 DISPLAY ( p age 62) Displays/changes the on-screen information displays . 20 Playback controls (page 5 1)  RE V SCAN  FWD SCAN (page 57) Press to start reverse or forward scanning. Press again to c hange the speed.  PLAY Press to start playback.  PA USE Press to pause p layback or recording.  STOP Press to stop playback. CM BACK (comme rcial back) Press repeatedly to skip progressively backward through the video playin g. CM SK IP (commercial sk ip) Press repeatedly to skip progressively forward th rough the video playing.  PREV  NEXT Press to skip to the previous or next title/ chapter/track; or to display the previous or next menu page.   STEP/SLOW (page 57) During pl ayback, press to start slow- motion pl ayback; while paused, press to show the previous or next video frame. 21 Recording controls (page 37)  REC Press to start recording. Press repeatedly to set the recording time in blocks of 30 mins. F STOP REC Press to stop recording. REC MODE (pa ge 36) Press r epeatedly to change th e recording mode (picture quality). TIMER RE C (page 38) Press to start setting a t imer recording. 22 TV CONTROL (page 1 32) After setting up, use these controls to control your TV. DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 28 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Getting started 29 En 04 Chapter 4 Getting started Switching on and setting up When you switch th e recorder on for the first time, you can ma ke several basic settings using the Setup Navigator feature. This takes you through setting the c lock, the internal TV tuner and the video output. If you’re using the recorder for the first time, we strongly recommend you use the Setup Navigator before starting to u se the recorder. Important • Some of the Setup Navigator on-screen displays (OSDs) in this secti on vary slightly d epending on t he country or region of purchase . • Unless otherwise stat e d, the OSDs shown in t his manual are fo r the Taiwan and Phili ppines model. 1 Switch on your TV an d set the video input to this recorder. 2 Switch on the recorder. When you switch on for the first time, yo ur TV should display the Setup Navigator screen (If the Setup Navigator do esn’t appear, you can also acce ss it from the In itial Setup me nu; see page 108). 3 Choose a langua ge (then press ENTER). 4 Start the Setup Navigator. • If you don’t want to use the Setup Navigator, press  to select Cancel , then press ENTER to exit the Setup Navigator. 5 Select an option then press ENTER. Taiwan and Philippines mode l: Other: • Select Do not set if you want to skip channel setup (because they have alread y been set up, for example). • You can go back to the previous screen in the Setup Navigator by pressing RETURN . • Select your country.  STANDBY/ON ENTER English Español Language Italiano Português ENTER k Setting t Line System e r Save P p Navigator p Navigator Start Cancel Start Complete this setup before you start using your recorder . Please use the Initial Setup if you want to make more detailed settings. ENTER k Setting t Line System e r Save P p Navigator p Navigator Auto Channel Setting English Cable Do not Set Antenna k Setting t Line System e r Save P Auto Channel Setting English Do not Set Auto Scan ENTER k Setting t Line System e r Save k Setting t Line System e r Save P Country Selection Country Singapore DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 29 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Getting started 04 30 En • Auto-tu ning channel s The Auto Scan op tion automatically scans and sets the channel presets. 6 Select ‘Auto’ for automatic time setting, or ‘Manua l’ to set the clock manually. • Auto clock se tting Some TV cha nnels broadcast time signals together with the programme. This recorder can use these signa ls to set the clock automaticall y. Set ‘Clock Set CH‘ to the channel preset number that broadcasts a ti me signal, th en move the cursor down to ‘Start’ and press ENTER. The recorder takes a short while to set the time. After you see that it’s set, select Next to proceed. If the time could not be set automati cally, press RETURN to go back to the previous screen and select Manual . • M anual clo ck setting If no stations in your ar ea are broadcasting time si gnals, you can set the clock manually. Use the / buttons to set yo ur time zone. You can set t his by selecting a ci ty or a time relative to GMT. Press  then use the / buttons to select ‘On’ o r ‘Off’ for dayl ight saving/summer time, then press ENTER. Select On if you are currently using daylight saving/summer time. Set the date and time, then press ENTER to make all the settings. Taiwan and Philipp ines model: The date is in month/day/year format. Other: The da te is in day/mo nth/year format . •U s e t h e / buttons to change the value in th e highlighted field. •U s e t h e / buttons to move from one field to an other. • Press ENTER to finish setting the time. T uning 32/68 Cancel ENTER k Setting t Line System e r Save P Clock Setting Auto Manual Auto k Setting t Line System e r Save P p Navigator p Navigator Auto Clock Setting Date Time Clock Set CH –– / –– / –––– –– : –– AM 2 Start k Setting Line System e r Save P p Navigator p Navigator Auto Clock Setting Date Time Clock Set CH 1 / 01 / 2007 MON 12 : 00 AM 2 Start Next k Setting t Line System e r Save P p Navigator p Navigator Manual Clock Setting Time Zone D.S.T Off Singapore Singapore 1/2 k Setting Line System e r Save P p Navigator p Navigator Manual Clock Setting Time Zone D.S.T On Singapore Singapore 1/2 k Setting t Line System e r Save P p Navigator p Navigator Manual Clock Setting Date Time Time Zone D.S.T On Singapore Singapore 1/ / 01 12 : 00 AM 2007 MON 2/2 DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 30 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Getting started 31 En 04 7 Sel ect the TV scre en type, ‘Wide (16:9)’ or ‘Standard (4: 3)’. 8 Select whether or not your TV is compatible with progressive scan video. 9 Set the HDMI output (on ly when an HDMI componen t is connected). • Depending on the HDMI co mponent you have connected, the above screen m ay not appe ar. • Select Yes if you want this unit to automatically set the optimum setting for the de vice connect ed to the HDMI terminal. • There are cases where nothing appears on the screen after the automatic setup due to an HDMI c able, etc. If you do not perform any operations in this case, this unit returns to the previous setting in 30 seconds. • Select No if you want to make this setting later. 10 Press to co ntinue after reading the HDD caution. 11 Select ‘Finis h Setup’ to exit the Setup Navigato r, or ‘Go Back’ if you want to start again. That completes basic setup using the Setup Navigator. • If there are blank channels with no station, you can set these to skip using the manual channel setting. See Manual CH Setting on page 109. ENTER k Setting t Line System e r Save P p Navigator p Navigator TV Screen Size Wide (16:9) Standard (4:3) ENTER k Setting t Line System e r Save P p Navigator p Navigator Progressive Compatible Not Compatible Don't Know Not Compatible ENTER k Setting Line System e r Save P p Navigator p Navigator HDMI Setting Ye s No Set to the transmission mode optimized for the connected device? * Under this setting, nothing may appear on the screen due to HDMI cables, etc. The mode returns to the current setting after 30 seconds. ENTER k Setting t Line System e r Save P p Navigator p Navigator In the event of HDD failure, recordings may be lost or normal playback/recording may not be possible. As recordings might be lost in case of a HDD failure, we recommend to use the HDD only as temporary storage media. Please copy recordings you want to keep to recordable DVD. Press ENTER to continue. ENTER k Setting t Line System e r Save p Navigator p Navigator Setup is complete! Finish Setup Go Back Finish Setup 04 Getting_Start ed.fm 31 ページ ２００７年 ９月１１日　火 曜日　午前１ １時２分
Recording 05 32 En Chapter 5 Recording About DVD recording This recorder can record to DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD R, DVD RW, DVD-RAM, DVD-R D L and DVD R DL media. DVD-R and DVD-RW discs can be initialized for Vide o mode or VR mode recording. Each has its advantages, and it depends on what you want to do with the recording which mode you choose. If you want to edit your recordings in any significant way, VR mode offers great er possibilities for cutt ing, copying, and changing the way the video is presented. Video mod e is less flexible when it comes t o editing, but it has the advantage tha t it is compatible with standard D VD players (many of which won’t play VR mode discs 1 ). Once a dis c is initializ ed for a partic ular mode, all recording on that disc wil l be in that mode. DVD RW d iscs can be initialized for VR mode recording. DVD-RAM discs can b e initialized for VR mode recording. DVD R di scs do not requi re initializing . Important The table below shows the maximum number of titles recordable per disc and the maximum number of chapters per title: *1 A maximum of 999 chapters are recordable per disc. *2 A maximum of 254 chapters ar e recordable per disc. • This recorder cannot play or record unfinalized DVD-R/-RW (Vi deo m ode) and DVD R discs recorded on another recorder. DVD RW discs rec orded on another recorder ar e playable on this recorder bu t are not recordable. • The maximum co ntinuous recording time fo r one title is e ight hours when using a DVD R/ RW disc. • If you delete a title from a DVD R/ RW disc, the total number of recordable titles remaining may not increase. • Although th is recorder can record PAL, SECAM, NTSC and PAL-60, yo u can’t mix multiple T V line systems on on e disc. A disc can contain P AL and SECAM recordings, or NTSC and PAL-60. Se e also Additional inf o rmation about the TV system settin gs on page 119. Note 1 S ome D VD players, such as some Pioneer models, are compatible with VR mode discs. Check the operating instructions for your player for VR mode compatibility information. Disc type/rec. format Max. titles (per disc) Max. chapters (per title) DVD- R/-RW Vid eo mo de 99 99 DVD-R/-RW/-RAM VR mode 99 999 *1 DVD R/ RW 49 99 *2 DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 32 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Recording 33 En 05 • If power to the recorder is cut (due to a power outage, the plug being pulled from the power outle t , etc.) during r ecording, editing, initializing, finalizing or other operation, some recorded material on the disc, or the disc itself, may become unusable. In this case, try re-initializing the disc (DVD -RW only), or use a new disc. Pioneer is not responsible for lost recordings, damaged discs or other losses in t hese cases. • Fingerprints, dirt and small scratch es on a disc can a ffect playb ack and/or recording pe rformance. Please take proper care of your discs. • Pioneer t akes no respon sibility for recording failure due to power cuts, defective discs, or damage to the recor der. • See also Disc/content format playback compatibility on page 7 for detailed disc compatib ility informati on. Recording to DVD-R DL/D VD R DL discs Recordi ng to DVD-R DL/DVD R DL discs i s generally the same as recording to regular single-layer discs; h owever, please note the followi ng points: • When the rec order switches from the first layer to the seco nd during recording a DVD-R DL (Video mode) disc, a new title is automatically started on t he new layer. • Up to 99 titles can be recorded on a DVD-R D L (Video mode) disc. If the 99th title is be ing recorded w hen the layer is switched, recording will stop. • Up to 49 titles can be recorded on a DVD R DL disc. • You cannot play, re cord additional material to , edit or finalize a DVD-R DL or DVD R DL disc that has been recorded on but no t yet finalized on another DVD recor der. About HDD recording Recording to the internal hard di sk drive (HDD) is very flexible; you have the full choice of re cording quality option s, including m anual mode, and of course yo u can record, erase a nd re-record as many times as you lik e. The capacity of the hard disk drive means that you can store many h ours of video on it, even using the higher quality recording modes. Important • The maximum number of titles/chapters per title that can be recorded on t h e HDD is 999 and 99 respective ly. No more recording i s possible on the HDD after the maximum number of titles has been reached. • The maximum co ntinuous recording time fo r one title is 1 2 hours. • It is possible to record both PAL and NTSC ti tles on the HDD. Before recording, you need to m ake sure that the Input Line System settin g (page 108) matches the TV line system of the source you’re recording. HDD Video mode compatibility When recording to the HDD yo u can choose to record in one of two forma ts. Set the format from the HDD Recording Format item in the Initi al Setup menu (see page 115). Taiwan and Philippines model: When set to Video Mode On, high-speed copying from HDD to DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R/ RW is possible. When recording a broadcast with a Secondary Audio Program me (SAP) channel, set which channel you wa nt to record from the Initia l Setup m enu (see Dual Mono Recording on page 111). DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 33 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Recording 05 34 En When HDD Recording Form at is set to Video Mode Off, high-speed c opying from HDD to DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or D VD R/ RW isn’t possible. However, when SAP is selected as the broadcast audio channel , both the main and SAP channels ar e recorded and you can switch the audio on playbac k. Other: When set to Video Mo de On, high-speed copying from H DD to DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R/ RW is possible. When recor ding a biling ual broadcast, set which channe l you wa nt to rec ord from the Initi al Setup menu (see Bil ingual Recording on page 111). When HDD Recording Form at is set to Video Mode Off, high-speed c opying from HDD to DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or D VD R/ RW isn’t possible. However, both channels of bilingual broadc asts are recorded and you can switch the audi o on playback. Recorded audio In all except the LP CM mode, sound is recorded in two ch annel Dolby Digital fo rmat (only Dolby Digit al 2.0 can be recorded; Dolby Digital 5.1 recordi ng is not possible) . When set to LPCM , sound is recor ded in high quality, uncompressed Linear PCM format. Taiwan and Philippines model: If the broadc ast audio has a SAP c hannel and you are recording to Video mode DVD-R/ -RW, DVD R/ RW, or to the HDD with the HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode On, or on th e LPCM setting, us e the AUDIO button to select the Mono , Stereo or SAP audio channel to record bef ore recording starts. In other cases, i f SAP is selected then both the main and SAP audio channels will be recorded and you ca n switch on playback. The table below shows the differen t audio output po ssibilities: Other: If the broadcast audio is bilingual and you are recording to DVD-R/-RW (Video mode), DVD R/ RW , or to the HD D with the HD D Recording Format set to Video Mo de On, or on the LPCM setting, use the Bilingual Recording setting (page 111) to sele ct the A/L or B/R audio chann el to record bef ore recording starts. In other cases, bo th channels of a bilingual broa dcast will be recorded and you can switch on playback. Restrictions on video recording You cannot re cord copy-p rotected video using this recorder. Copy-pro tected video includes DVD-Video discs and some satellite broadcasts. If copy-protected material is encountered during a rec ording, recording will pause automatical ly and an error message will be displayed on-screen. Video that is ‘copy-o nce only’ can only be recorded to DVD-RAM or HDD, CPRM- compatible V R mode DVD-R/-RW (see below). When recording a TV broadcast or through an external input, you ca n display copy control infor mation on scree n (see Displayin g disc informat ion on-scree n on page 62). Audio sett ing Audio output Left (L) Right (R) MONO L R L R STEREO LR SAP L R SAP DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 34 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Recording 35 En 05 CPRM CPRM is a copy prot ection/scrambling system developed for the recording of ‘copy once’ broadcast prog ra mmes. CPRM stands for Con tent Protection for Reco rdable Media . This reco rder is CPRM c ompatible, whi ch means that you c an record copy-o nce broadcast programmes, but you cannot then make a copy o f those recordings. CPRM recordings can only be made on CPRM- compatible DVD-R (ver. 2.0/8x or h igher) or DVD-RW (ver. 1.1 or higher) discs formatted in VR mode, DVD-RAM discs or on the HDD. DVD CPRM recordings can only be played on players that are sp ecifically co mpatible with CPRM. Recording equipment and copyright Recordin g equipment shou ld be used o nly for lawful copying and you are advised to check careful ly what is lawful copying in t he country in which you are making a copy. Copying o f copyright mat erial such as f ilms or music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal ex ception or con sented to by the rightowners. This product in corporates copyri ght protection technology that is protec ted by method claims of certain U.S. pa tents and other intellectua l property rights owne d by Macrovision Corporati on and other rights owner s. Use of this copyrigh t protection technology mu st be authorized by Macrovisio n Corporatio n, and is intended for ho me and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise au thorized by Macrovision Co rporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Using the built-in TV tuner There are three different ways to select TV channels. Note that you can’t change the TV channel du ring playback, reco rding or during recording stan dby. • CH /– buttons • Number buttons For example, to select chann el 4, press 4 then ENTER ; for channel 34, press 3 , 4, ENTER . 1 • CH /– buttons on the front panel Changing audio channels Taiwan and Philippines model: Some TV programmes are broadcast with both a main and a Secondary Audio Programme (SAP ). You can change the TV audio using the AUDIO button. • Press to change the audio type. The current audio channel is displayed on- screen. •I f SAP is selected, but there is no SAP channel b eing broadca st, you will still hear the main au dio channel. • If the sound is poor quality when set to Stereo , you can often improve it by changing to Mono . Note 1• Taiwan and Philippines m odel: Antenna channels are num bered 2 through 69. Cabl e channels are numbered 1 through 125. • Other: Channel presets are numbered 1 through 99. CH ABC DEF GHI JKL MNO PQRS TUV WXYZ CLEAR CLEAR AUDIO Mono SAP Stereo DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 35 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Recording 05 36 En Note • When recording to the HDD with HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode On, to DVD in Video mode, or on the LPCM setting, only one channel of a dual mono broadcast is recorded. In this ca se, decide which language yo u want to record bef ore recording by setting the Dual Mono Recording set ting (see Dual Mono Recordin g on page 111). Other: You can chan ge the audi o channel of the broadcast or external input signal. • Press to change the audio type. The current audio channel is displayed on- screen. • If the NICAM audio settin g (see NICAM Select on page 110) is set to NICAM and you are watching a NICAM broadcast, you can switch between NICAM and Regular (non-NICAM) audio. • If the NICAM broadcas t is bilingual, you can also select t he language. • You can al so select the langua ge for a non-NICAM bili ng ual broadcast. • When watching a reco rding made from an external input with Bili ngual recording selected (see Ex ternal Audio on page 110), you can switch the audio channel between left ( L ), right ( R ) or both ( L R ). Note • When recording to the HDD with HDD Recording Forma t set to Video Mode On, to DVD in Video mode, or o n the LPCM setting, only one cha nnel of a bilingual broadcast is recorded. In this cas e, decide which language you wa nt to record before recording by sett ing the Bilingual Recording setting (see Bilingual Recording on page 111). Setting the picture quality/ recording time Before starting a recording, you will usu ally want to set the picture quality/recording time. There are six standard settings available, which allo w you to choose a balance between picture quality and recording time. When Manual Re cording is set to On (see Manua l Recording on page 114), a further option will be av ailable ( MN1 to MN32 , LPCM , or XP (a super- high quality HDD recording mode that features a tr ansfer rate of around 15 Mbps) dep ending on what you set). When recording to DVD, MN32 is the highest recording quality availa ble. If you select XP , the recording mode will automat ically revert to MN32 . When recording to DVD R/ RW, SL P is the longest reco rding time availa ble. If you select SEP or MN1 to MN3 , the recording mode w ill automat ically revert to SLP . • Press repeatedly to select the recording quality. • XP – High quality setting, gives about one hour of recording ti me on a DVD disc. • SP (Standar d Play) – Default qu ality, used for most ap plications, gives about two hours of r ecording time on a DVD. AUDIO NICAM Regular NICAM A NICAM B Regular NICAM A B A (L) B (R) A B (L R) LR L R DVD ( VR) DVD ( Video) DVD R DVD RW DVD-RAM HDD REC MODE DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 36 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Recording 37 En 05 • LP (Long Play) – Lo wer video quality than SP, but doubles the recording time on a DVD to about four ho urs. • EP (Extended Play) – Lower qualit y than LP, but giv es about six hou rs of recording time on a DVD disc. • SLP (Super Long Play) – Lower quality than EP, but gives about eight hours of recording time on a DVD disc. • SEP (Super Extended Play) – Lowest video quality but gives about ten hours of recording time on a DVD disc. • MN1 to MN32/ LPCM 1 / XP 2 – Manual / Linear PCM/ XP (available o nly when manual recording is on). The setting is indicated i n the front panel display, and shown on-screen together with the recording time for a blank recordable disc. If a recordable disc is loaded, the approximate remaini ng recording time for that disc is also shown. (Note that if the O n Screen Display setting (see On Screen Display on page 118) is Off then this information is not displayed .) Basic recording from the TV Basic recording from the TV involves just setting the cha nnel to record, choos ing whether to rec ord to the HDD o r a DVD and selecting t he recording qua lity. 1 Select the HDD or DVD for recording. • If you’re recor ding to DVD, load a record able disc (if you lo ad a new blank DVD-RW or DVD RW disc, the reco rder takes a s hort while t o initialize th e disc). • If you want to recor d a VR mode DVD-R or a Video mode DVD-RW, you must initialize it before proceeding (see Initializing recordable DVD discs on page 49). 2 S elect a TV channel to record. The front panel displa y shows the channel number: • While the recorder is stopped, you can also use the nu mber buttons on the remote to select the channel (e.g., fo r channel 24, press 2 , 4 then ENTER ). • If the recorder is stopped, you can also use t he CH /– buttons on the front panel to select the channel number. 3 Set the picture quality/recording time. • See Setting the p icture quality/recording time on page 36 for detailed in structions . 4 Select the audio chan nel to record. See Changing audio channels on page 35 for more on this. Taiwan and Philippines mode l: • When recording in VR mo de (DVD) or with HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode Off (HDD), both mono and SA P audio c hannels are recorded, allowing you to switch the audio channel on playback. T h e only except ion to this is when the picture quality is set to LPCM , in which case you do need to select the audio channe l before recording. Note 1• Taiwan a nd Philippine s model: Audio is rec orded in 16-bit Linear PCM format, v ideo is recorded at XP quality. When recording a broadcast with a SAP channel, select wh ich audio channel to record (s ee Dual Mono Recording on page 11 1). • Other: Audi o is recorded in 16-bit Linear PCM format, video is recorded at XP quality. When recording a bilingual broadcast, selec t which audio channel to rec ord (see Biling ual Recording on page 111). 2 Applicable only to HDD recording. (I f this setting is used when recording to DVD, MN32 is us ed.) When copied to DV D, XP recordings are always copied in real time. DVD ( VR) DVD ( Video) DVD R DVD RW DVD-RAM HDD HDD DVD CH Channel number ch REC MODE AUDIO DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 37 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Recording 05 38 En Other: • When recording in VR mo de, if a broadcast is biling ual, both audio channels are recorded, allowing you to switch the audio channel on playback. The only exception to this is when the picture quality is set to LPCM , in wh ich case you do need to select the au dio channel bef ore recording. 5 Start recording. If you want to set a recording e nd ti m e, press the  REC button repeatedly. The recording time increases in 30 minute increments, up to a maximum of six hours. The time the recording will end is shown on -screen and in the front panel display. When the recording ends, the recorder au tomatically switches into standby if no other operation is being performed. • To cancel the set recording tim e, press  REC . • If yo u want to pause r ecording at any time 1 , press  PAUSE . Press again to restart the recording (If reco rding to the HDD, DVD-RAM or in VR mode, a new chapter is star ted after recording restart s). 6 Press to stop recording. • If you s et the recordin g time in th e previous step, you can still stop the recording anytime by pressing F STOP REC . • Recording will stop automatically when there is no more space o n the HDD/DVD, or after 12 ho urs of HDD recording (whichever is sooner). Setting a timer recording Using the timer recording featu res you can program up to 32 timer recordings up to a month in advance. Timer rec ording programmes can be set to record just once, every day, or every wee k. There are three ways to set a timer recording; using the Easy Timer Recording feature (see Easy Timer Recording on page 3 9), using the G-Code programm ing system (see Timer recording using the G-C ode™ programming system on page 40), or using manu al timer recording (see Setting a manual timer recording on page 42). You can set the rec ording quality for your timer recording in the sa me way as for a regular recording, but with the added option of an AUTO mode, which maximizes the recording quality for the spa ce available on the disc (if recording to DVD), or to fit on to a blank DVD disc (if re cording to the HDD). You can set timer reco rdings to record to a recordable DVD or to the hard disk drive. For regular (daily or weekly) HDD timer recordings that you don’t need to keep, yo u can use the Auto Replace Recording feature to autom atically repl ace the previou s timer recording with the new one. Note that when you use this feature, the previous recordin g made on that timer programme will be replaced by the next one, regardle ss of whether you have watched it yet or not. You can also set the recorder so that it will adjust the recording qu ality to try an d fit the recording on to the disc if it would not otherwise fit at th e recording quality you set (see Optimized Rec on page 114 for more on this). Finally, if you set a timer recording to record to DVD but there isn’t a recorda ble DVD loaded at the time of th e recording, the Recovery Recording featur e will automat ically record the programme to the HDD for you. Note 1 Except during Chase Play. REC STOP RE C DVD ( VR) DVD ( Video) DVD R DVD RW DVD-RAM HDD DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 38 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Recording 39 En 05 Important • A timer recording can’t be set if there are already 32 timer programmes waiting to be recorded. • Timer recordin g will not start if: – The recorder is already recording. – A dis c is being init ialized, finalized or unfina lized. • Timer r ecording will st art when th e operat ion preventing time r recording has finishe d. • When the front panel display is set to ON, the timer indicator ( ) lights in the front panel display wh en the timer is active. If the indicator is blinking it means that (for a DVD timer reco rding) there is no disc loaded, or the disc loaded is not recordable (fo r an HDD timer recording it means that the HDD is not recorda ble). • Approximately two minutes before a timer recording is set to sta rt, the recorde r will go into timer recording standby. In timer re cordin g standby you cannot use some func tions. • The maximu m length for timer recordings made to th e HDD is 24 hours . Howeve r, because one title (HD D) is limited to 12 hours, recordings over 12 hours will be spre ad over tw o titles. Note that there will be a break in the recording of a few seconds between titles. • When a scheduled recording finishes, this unit’ s power is not turned of f if the power for the plasma television is on. If you want this un it’s power to turn off after a timer recor ding finishes, set the HDMI Control to Off (page 117). Easy Timer Recording As the name suggests, Easy Tim er Recording makes setting up a timer recording as simple as possible. Important • Unless otherwise stat e d, the OSDs shown in t his manual are fo r the Taiwan and Phili ppines model. 1 Select ‘Timer Recordi ng’, then ‘Easy Timer’ fro m the Home Menu. 2 Set the TV chan nel to record. 3 Set the recording qu ality. • DVD recording: The AUTO opti on automatically sets the best recording quality for the space av ailable on th e disc loaded at the time of recording. • HDD recording: The AUTO option automatically sets the best recording quality that would fit on t o a blank DVD disc. 4 Select the HDD or DVD for recording. 5 Mo ve the cursor to the recording start date an d ti me on the grid. • You can move the cu rsor forward or back an hour at a time using the  REV SCAN and  FWD SCAN buttons. HOME MENU PREV NEXT AM PM Easy Timer Recording 7ch 1/01 MON 9:30 SP REC MODE 8:00 9:00 10:00 11:00 12:00 1:00 2:00 AM – ––:–– 1/01 1/02 1/03 HDD HDD/DVD  REC MODE HDD DVD AM PM Easy Timer Recording 7ch 1/01 MON 11:45 SP REC MODE 8:00 9:00 10:00 11:00 12:00 1:00 2:00 AM – ––:–– 1/01 1/02 1/03  Current time Recording start time HDD HDD/DVD DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 39 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Recording 05 40 En Each row of the grid is one d ay (you can set the timer recording for up to a month in advance). Each column is a 15 min ute interval. The darker area represents time th at has already passed and ca n’t therefore be selected. The lighter area is time that’s availa ble. 6 Set the start time. The start date and time is displayed in the middle of the screen. • You can go back and reset t he start time if you need to by pressing RETURN . 7 Move the cursor to the recording end time on the grid. As you move the cursor aro und the grid, an arrow stretches from the start time to the current cursor po sition, representing the length of the recording. A recording o f up to six hours can be set. 8 Set the end time. 9 Select ‘Yes’ to set the timer recording and exit, or ‘No’ to go back to the Easy Timer Record ing screen. • You can check th e timer recording details you just set from the main timer recording screen (see S etting a manual timer recording on page 42). Timer recording using the G-Code™ programming system This system makes programming timer recordings very simple. Most TV guides publish G-C ode programming nu mbers with their programme details. If you want to make a timer recording of a p rogramme, you just input the cor responding code. The date, start, stop and channel settings are made automatically. All you have to do is tell th e recorder the recording m ode, and whether it’s a onc e-only recording or a regula r recording. Note that if the country setting is incorrect (set in the Setup Navigator), timer recordings made using the G-Code programming system may not work as expected. 1 Press ‘G-Code ’ to display the G-Code programme screen. You can also access this screen from the Home Menu (press HOME MENU , select Timer Recording , then G-Code system ). • Use the number buttons to enter the G-Code programming number. (To clear the last digit entered, press CLEAR .) • You can a lso use the /// buttons to select digits from the on- screen display. 2 After making the settings, select ‘Enter’ and press ENTER. The timer recording screen appears with the timer programme you just set. ENTER AM PM Easy Timer Recording 7ch 1/01 MON 11:45 SP REC MODE 11:00 12:00 1:00 2:00 3:00 4:00 5:00 AM – 1:45 PM 1/01 1/02 1/03  Recording start time Recording end time HDD HDD/DVD ENTER G-Code# 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Clear Enter Details Cancel 2 DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 40 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Recording 41 En 05 3 Confirm that the se ttings are correct. If the channel n umber isn’t displayed, use the / buttons to highli ght CH , then u se the / buttons to set the correc t channel number . • If the channel number is set, but incorrectly, set up the guide channel (see G-Code CH Setting on page 109). 4 Select ‘Store Prog ramme’ to finish. • Other op tions in th e same me nu panel allow you to name the programme, and change the re cording destinat ion and/or record ing mode. Checking/editing tim er recording settings You can check and/o r edit the timer recording settings ma de by the G-Code system by selecting Det ails from the G-Code# setting screen. 1 Select ‘Details’ from the G-Code# setting screen. The Timer Programme Set scr een appears, filled out w ith the timer recording det ails. 2 Check and e dit the fields as necessary. See Setting a manual timer recording on page 42 for more on this. 3 Select ‘Store Programme’ to save the timer programme and exit. G-Code programming wi th the power off You can enter a G-Co de programming number when the recorder is in standby. Note that the recording is always made to the HDD. If you want to record to a DVD disc, you’ll need to switch on the power and use the full G-Code programme screen. Important • You can’t use this featur e until you have set up the guide channels, see G-Code CH Setting on page 109. • You can’t change the recording mode . • You can’t pr ogram daily or weekly tim er recordings. 1 Press ‘G-Code ’. The front panel displa y shows the current recording mode and prompts you to enter the G-Code programming number. 2 Use the number bu ttons to enter the number. • To clear the last digit entered, press CLEAR . 3 Press ENTER. The display shows the timer settings: Date  Start time  End time  HDD and Recording channel  Recording mode •I f CODE ERROR appears in the display, check that the number is correct and that the guide channel is set (see G-Code CH Setting on page 109), then set the timer recording again. •I f CAN’T SET appears in the display, it means th at although you entered a valid number, the programme has already finished. ENTER ENTER DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 41 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Recording 05 42 En Setting a manua l timer recording The timer recording screen you can see all the timer programmes already set, clear progr ammes and s et up new ones . 1 Press TIMER REC to display the Timer Recording screen. You can also access the Timer Recording screen from the Home Men u (press HOME MENU , select Timer R ecording , then Timer Recording ). This screen shows all the timer programmes currently set. • Each row is for one timer recording programme, with the date and time information, channe l, recording mode, DVD or HDD and recording sta tus. • The amount of free space available on the HDD and the curren tly loaded recorda ble DVD is sh own towards the bottom of the screen. • In the upper-right corner, the number of timer programmes already set is sh own next to Tmr Pgm s . • If there are more than five timer programmes already set, press NEXT  to switch page (go back using the PREV  button). • You can also delete a timer programme before it’s started (before the recorder enters timer recording st andby) by highlighting it and pressing CLEAR . See also Deleti ng a timer programme on page 44. 2 Select ‘New Input’ to set a new timer programme, then press ENTER. 3 Enter the timer recording settings. Use the / buttons to select a field; use the / buttons to change the value. • CH – Choose a channel (2 to 69 for antenna chann els; 1 to 125 for cable/Pr1 to Pr 99, excluding skip channels), or one of the external inputs from whi ch to record. • Date – Choose a date up to one month in advance, or select a daily or weekly programme. • Start – Set the recording start time. • Stop – Set the recording end time (maximum len gth of a timer recording is 24 hours). • Extend – Extend the end time of the timer recording (select Off , 30 , 60 , 90 or 120 mins). 4 If you want to change the re cording mode, re cording destin ation, etc., sele ct ‘Set Deta iled’. In this are a you can set: Record to – Select HDD for hard disk recording or DVD for D VD recording. Select HDD for Auto Re place Recording (daily or weekly timer recording only). Recording Mod e – Select XP , SP , LP , EP , SLP or SEP , (See Setting the pictur e quality/ recording time on pa ge 36). If Manual Recording is o n, then you can also select the LPCM setting, XP or MN (pres s ENTER then use the /  buttons to select the level). HDD Remain DVD Remain 59h59m(SP) 1h59m(SP) 3/26 SUN 3:00PM Tmr Pgms 3/32 Manhattan Open T ennis OK 3/26 SUN 6:00PM – 7:00PM 10ch World Journey OK 3/27 MON 7:30PM – 9:00PM 4ch 8ch Flower Until 4/20 MON – FRI 1:30PM – 2:00PM New Input Timer Programme View Timer Programme Set Manhattan Open T ennis CH Date Start Stop Extend 10ch EVERYDA Y 6:00PM 7:00PM 30 min Enter Details Detailed Settings Record T o HDD Recording Mode XP Auto Replace Rec. On Genre No Category Dual Mono Recording L HDD Recording Format Video Mode On Store Programme Cancel Set Title Name Set Detailed DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 42 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Recording 43 En 05 Auto Replace Rec. – Automatically erases the previous daily or weekly recording when the next one is recorded. Genre – Select a record genre (for HDD recording only). Dual Mono/B ilingual Recordi ng – Select which ch annel of a du al mono/bil ingual broadcast to record (necessary if r ecording to a Video mode DVD or to the HDD with the HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode On ). HDD Recording Format – Select Video Mode On or Video Mode Off depending on whether you need high-speed co pying to Video mo de DVD capabilit y or not. 5 After entering all the timer recording informat ion, highligh t ‘Store Programme’ and press ENTER. The timer recording list scr een is displayed again. The timer programme you just input appears in the list. T he rightmost column shows various timer recording status messages: • OK – Can be recorded. • Time Over – Not enough space on the HDD (the recording won’t f inish). • Over 1 2h – Reco rding time of over 12 hours set (when recording to the HDD the recording will be s p lit i n to two titl es). • Overla p – Two timer programmes partially or completely over lap. The one starting earlier will take p riority. • Until ... (eg., Until 8/13 ) – For a re gular recording, the last programme t h at could be recorded is shown. • Data O ver – Can’t record because the d i s c m a na g e m e n t a r e a o f t h e d i s c i s f u l l . • Cancel Once – A regular timer progra mme is set to skip. • Can’t Rec – Not poss ible to record . • Title Over – Can’t record beca use there is already the maximum number of titles on the disc (HDD: 999; DVD: 99). • Recording – The programme is currently record ing. • Standby – The recorder is in timer recording st andby. • nothing displayed – A nother timer recordin g or copying is in progres s. 6 To exit the timer recording screen, press HOME MENU. Tip • To enter a title name for the timer recording in advan ce, select Set Title Name and follow the on-scr een display. Note • If you se t a DVD timer re cording but there is no recor dable DVD disc loaded, or the disc loaded doesn’t have eno ugh free space for th e complete recording, Recovery is shown. In this case (unl ess you load a suitable disc before the recording actu ally starts), the recorder will use the HDD for recordin g. (The mess age Can’t Rec will appear if there are already 999 titles on th e HDD or if there is not enou gh free space on the HDD for recordin g.) • For a DVD timer re cording, if Optimized Rec (see Optimized Rec on page 114) is set to On , the recorder will adjust the recording quality to try and fi t the recording on the di sc. If the recording will not fit onto the disc even on MN1 ( MN4 for DVD R/ RW) r ecording quality then the Reco very Recording feature will automatically make the recording to the HDD ins tead. • If there is very little free space left on th e HDD, an Auto Repla ce Recording may not complete successfully. • If the HDD is being used for playback or high-speed copying when an Auto Replace Recording is due to start, the new tim er recording w ill not replac e the old one. However, the next time the timer recordi ng starts, bo th of the ol der two programmes will be erased. DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 43 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Recording 05 44 En Editing a timer programme You can chan ge any of the settings in a timer programme before the re cording is due to start. 1 Press TIMER REC. 2 Highlight the timer programme you want to change. 3 Press  then select ‘Modify’ from the command me nu panel. Alternatively, press ENTER . The Timer Programme Set scr een appears from which you ca n edit the settings. 4 Edit the timer reco rding settings as necessary. 5 Select ‘Store Prog ramme’ to finish. Confirm the settings you made from the following screen. Deleting a timer programme You can delete tim er programmes you no longer need. 1 Press TIMER REC. 2 Highlight the timer programme you want to erase. 3 Press  then select ‘Erase’ from the command me nu panel. • Select Yes to confirm or No to cancel. • You can also just press CLEAR when the timer programme is highlighted. Skipping a regular timer programme If you’ve set a regular daily or weekly timer programme, you can set th e recorder to skip the next sc heduled record ing. 1 Press TIMER REC. 2 Highlight the timer programme you want to skip. 3 Press  then select ‘Cancel Once’ from the command menu pane l. • In the timer programme list, Cancel Once appears by the programm e. • You can also just press  PAUSE whe n the timer programme is highlighted. Extending a time r recording in progress You can extend a tim er recording beyond the programmed end time in two different ways. This can be useful if a broadcast programme overruns, for example. Cancelling or extending the tim er 1 Press and hold for three seconds during a time r recording. Recording continues, but the timer indic a tor disappears from the f ront panel display indicati ng that th e ti mer has been cancelled. 2 Press repeatedly to extend recording in 30 minute blocks. Programming a new end time You can edit the end time of a timer recording you have previously set. 1 Press TIMER REC. 2 Highlight the timer recording you want to change. 3 Press  then sel ect ‘Modify’ from the command menu pane l. Alternatively, press ENTER . The Timer Programme Set scre en appears, from which you ca n edit the settings. 4 Edit the end time as necessary. You can al so edit the Extend time parameter. REC REC ENTER ENTER DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 44 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Recording 45 En 05 5 Select ‘Store Programme’. 6 Press to exit the Timer Recording screen. Stopping a timer recording 1 Press during a timer recording. 2 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm. Preventing use of the recorder before a timer recording (child lock) You can make all t he front pan el and remote control but tons inoperative using the child lock feature. This is usef ul when you set a timer recording and want to make su re that the timer settings are not changed before recording has fin ished. 1 If the recorder is on, switch it into standby. 2 [Fro nt panel] Press an d hold for three seconds to lock the controls. The front panel display briefly shows LOCKED . If any buttons are pressed o n the remote or fron t panel, LOCKED is brief ly displayed again . • To unlock th e recorder, press and hold  (Stop) on the front panel (while the recorder is stopped) for three seconds until the display shows UNLOCKED . • Even if you m ake child lock s ettings, this unit can still be controlled by the remote of a connected plasma television. If you do not wa nt this unit to be able to be controlled by another compo nent when you have set a child lock, turn this unit’s HDMI Control to OFF (page 117). Timer recording FAQ Frequently Aske d Questions • Even though the timer is set, the recorder doesn’t start recording! Check that the disc loaded or HDD is recordable, not locked (see Lock Disc on page 102), and that there are fewer than 99/999 titles already on the D VD/HDD. • The recorder won’t let me enter a timer programme! Why not? You can’t enter a timer programme if the clock isn’t set . • What happens when two or more timer programm es overlap? Basically, the pr ogramme with the earlier recording start time has priority. However, the re corder will start recording the programme with the later start time after the earlier programme is finished . If schedule t o record two programmes hav e the same times (but different cha nnels, for example), then only one of the two prog rammes will be recorded. In this event you s hould cancel the scheduled re cording of the lesser important pr ogramme. If one of the overlapping programmes is a regula r timer pro gramme, you may choo se ‘Cancel Once ’ in order to av oid having it overlap with a se parately scheduled programme ( see Skipping a regular timer programme on page 44). ENTER HOME MENU STOP RE C ENTER  STANDBY/ON DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 45 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Recording 05 46 En Simultaneous recording and playback (Chase Play) Chase Play allows you to watch a recording that is st ill in progress from the start, w ithout having to wait unt il the recordi ng has finis hed (i.e., playback is ‘chasing’ the recording). In fact, you’re no t just limited to watching the reco rding in prog ress. You can watch anything else already on the HDD (or o n a DVD if you’re rec ording to the HDD) by selecting it from th e Disc Navigator screen (see Using th e Disc Naviga tor with recordable discs and the HDD on page 55). Chase Play is not possible when DV is the recording input. Important • You can’t use this feature during Auto Start Recording, or in Auto Start Recording standby (the AUTO indicator is lit i n the front p anel display ). • Press during recording to start playback from th e b eginning o f the current recording 1 . • Pre ss during recording to select another title to play. You can use all the usual play back controls, such as pause , slow-motion play , scan and skip. • To stop playback, press  STOP (recording will continue). • To stop recording, press F STOP REC (playback wi ll continue). • During recording o r in timer recording standby, you can’t play an HD D title, DVD or Video CD /Super VCD disc if th e Input Line System setting doesn’t ma tch the TV line system of the disc/HDD title (see also Additional information about the TV syste m settings on page 119). Also, during simultaneous recording a n d p l a y b a c k , i f t h e T V l i n e s y s t e m o f t h e playback trac k/title changes then playba ck will auto matically stop. Recording from an external component You can record from an external component, such as a camco rder or VCR, connect ed to one of the recorder’s exte rnal inputs. 1 Make sure that the componen t you want to record from is connected properly to the HDD/DVD recorder. See Chapter 2 ( Connecting up ) for connection options. 2 Pre ss repeatedly to select one of the external inputs to record from. There are three analog inputs. The current input is shown on-screen an d in the front panel display: • L1 – INPUT 1/AU TO START REC • L2 – INPUT 2 (fr ont panel) • L3 – INPUT 3 Check that the Audio In settings for External Audio , and Dua l Mono Recording/Bi lingual Recording are as you want them (see Audio In on page 110). • If the aspect ratio is distorted (squashed or stretched), adjust on the source component or your TV befo re recording. Note 1 You can’t start playback immediately after recording st arts. Simultaneous playback and recording doesn’t w ork while copying or backing up. HDD PLAY DISC NAVIGA TOR DVD ( VR) DVD ( Video) DVD R DVD RW DVD-RAM HDD INPUT SELECT DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 46 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Recording 47 En 05 • To watch video coming in via th e DV input (fr ont panel), selec t DV > DV Vide o Playba ck from the Ho me Men u (see also Playing from a DV camcorder on page 64). 3 Set the recording qu ality. • See Setting the picture quality/recording time on page 36 for detailed in formation. 4 Select the HDD or DVD for recording. 5 Press to start recording. • If your source is copy-p rotected using Copy Gu ard, you will not be able to recor d it. S ee Restrictions on vi deo recording on page 34 fo r more details. Automatic recording from a satellite tuner If you have a satellite tune r or some other kind of se t top box co nnected to the INPUT 1/AUTO START REC input, you can have the recorder start a nd stop recording automatically with the timer set tings of the connected component. (If the other component doesn’t have a built-in timer, you’ll need to use it with an external timer unit. ) 1 After setting up for Auto Start Recording, this recorder sta rts recording when it de tects a signal from the other com ponent. When the signal cease s, the recorder stop s recording. Important • It take s a little while for this r ecorder to switch on an d start recording af ter detecting a signal. Please bear this in mind when setting the timer. • If Auto Start Recording is set, it will not start if another timer rec ording is in progress. • Timer recordings tak e precedence over Auto St art Recordin g. Auto Start Recording will stop i f a timer reco rding is due to start. After the timer recording has finished, Auto Start Recording wil l resume. •T u r n t h e HDMI Control s etting to Off when using Auto Start Recording (page 117). 1 Set the timer for the satellite receiver (or other component), th en switch it into standby (if necessary). Check the manual that came with the receiver if you’ re not sure how to do this. 2 Check that the ‘Audio In’ settings for ‘External Audio ’ and ‘Dual Mono Recording/Bi lingual Recordin g’ are as you want them. See Audio In on page 110 for more on these settings. 3 Set up the recorder. •U s e REC MODE to set the recording quality. See Setting the picture qualit y/ recording time on page 36 for detailed information. 4 Press HOME MENU and select ‘Timer Recording’ , then ‘Auto Start Recording’ . 5 Select ‘Yes’ to switch Auto Start Recording on , or ‘No’ to switch off. If you choose ‘Yes’ the recorder automatically goes into stand by. The AUTO in dicator in the front panel display light s. The recorder will automatically switch on and start reco rding when the other component com es on . Recording st ops when the external co mponent switches off. Note 1 Y ou can’t set Auto Start Recording when: – the recorder is recording or in timer recording standby. – the HDD is not recordable. – the HDD already contains the maximum number of titles (999). REC MODE HDD DVD REC HDD DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 47 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Recording 05 48 En • To cancel Auto Start Recording, press  STANDBY/ON while the recorder is in standby. The AUTO indicator goes off. • To cancel Auto Start Recording once recording has al ready started, press  REC for three seconds (this cancels Auto Start Rec ording, but recording continues), then F ST OP REC to stop record ing. • You can also stop recording by pressing F STOP REC then select ing Yes to confirm. Tip • Alternatively, with no OSD displayed, press and hold the front panel F STOP REC button for more than three se conds to switch Auto St art Recording on directly. After switching on, switch the record er into standb y. When using the Video Control function of an external component, set the HDMI Control to Off (page 117). Playing your recordings on other DVD players Most regular DVD playe rs can play finalized discs recorded in DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) and DVD R discs. A number of players (including many Pioneer mo dels) can also play DVD-RW discs recorded in VR mode, finalized or not. Most playe rs will not play VR mode DVD-R discs, although some DVD-ROM drives and DVD recorders m ay be able to (finaliz ation might be necessary). Check the manual that came with the player to check what kinds of discs it will play. When you finalize a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) o r DVD R disc, a title m enu is created from which you can select titles when you play the disc. There are a num ber of different styles of title menu to choose from to suit the co ntent of the disc. All the title menus are navigated i n the usual way, pressing MENU or TOP MENU to display the menu, then using the /// followed by ENTER to select titles and start playback. Finalizing a disc Finalizing ‘fixes’ the recordings on th e disc so that it can be played on a regula r DVD player or computer equipped with a suitable DVD-ROM drive. 1 Note that the disc name will appear in the title menu after you finalize a disc. Make sure the disc name is as you want it before you finalize the disc as it can’t be changed afterwards. If you want to rename the disc, see Input Disc Name on page 102 before starting the steps below. DVD RW discs do n’t generally need finalizing. However, if you wan t a title menu to appear when you play the disc, then you will need to finalize. When using a DVD RW, you can still record and edit even after final izing. althoug h the title me nu will disappear if you do so . Finalize the disc again to generate a new title menu. Important • Once you’ve finalized a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R disc, you can’t e d i t o r r e c o r d a n y t h i n g e l s e o n t h a t d i s c . However, the finalization on a D VD-RW disc maybe ‘undone’; see Undo Finali ze on page 103 for how to do this. DVD ( VR) DVD ( Video) DVD R DVD RW Note 1 If the TV line system of the disc is di fferent to the current setting of the reco rder, you will not be abl e to finalize the disc. See Additional information abou t the TV system settings on page 119 for how to change the re corder’s setting. DVD ( VR) DVD ( Video) DVD R DVD RW DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 48 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Recording 49 En 05 • A VR mode DVD-R/-RW (excluding DVD-R DL) disc can st il l be recorded and edited on this reco rder even after final izing. • DVD-R DL (Video m ode) discs and DVD R DL discs must be finalized in order to play in oth er recorders/players. Note however that some recorders/ players will not play even finalized dual- layer discs. 1 Load the disc you want to fi nalize. Make sure that the recorder is stopp ed before proceeding. 2 Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the Home Menu. 3 Select ‘Finalize’ > ‘Final ize’ > ‘Next Screen’. 4 For DVD-R/ -RW (Video mod e) and DVD R/ RW discs onl y, select a title menu styl e, then select ‘Yes’ to start finalization or ‘No’ to cancel. The menu you select will be the one that appears when the ‘top menu’ (or ‘menu’ for a DVD R/ RW) is selecte d on any DVD player. • Discs recorded partia lly or fully on the Pioneer DVR-7000 DVD recorder do not support this feature. These discs will have only a text title menu when finalized on this recorder. 5 The recorder will now start finalizi ng the disc. During finalizati on: • If the fina lization process of a DVD-RW or DVD R/ RW disc i s going to take more than a round four minu tes, you can press ENTER to cancel. Around four minutes before completion, the option t o cancel disappears. • You can’t cancel the finalization of a VR mode DVD-R disc. • How long finalization take s depends on the type of disc, how m uch is recorded on the disc and the num ber of titl es on the disc. A disc recorded in VR mode can take up to one hour to finalize. DVD-R/ -RW (Video mode) and DVD R/ RW discs can take up to 20 minutes. Initializing recordable DVD discs DVD-R/-RW discs c a n be in itialized for either Video mode recording or VR mode recording. 1 When you first loa d a blank DVD-RW or DVD RW disc, the recorder i nitializes it fo r recording automatically. By default, blank DVD-RW discs are init ialized for VR mode recording. See DV D-RW Auto Initialize on page 50 if you want to cha nge the default to Video mode. DVD-R discs are ready for Video mode recordings out of the bo x ; if you want to use a DVD-R for VR m ode recording, you must initializ e it before record ing anything on the disc. HOME MENU ENTER Basic Initialize Finalize Optimize HDD Disc Setup Finalize Undo Finalize Next Screen Start Finalize ENTER Finalize Note 1 If a disc was previously finalized on an older DVD recorder, you may not be able to re -initialize and/or initialize it for Vi deo mode recording . DVD-R DVD-RW DVD RW DVD-RAM DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 49 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Recording 05 50 En DVD RW and DVD-RA M discs can also be initialized in order to erase t he contents of the disc. Important • Initializing a DVD-RW , DVD RW or DVD-RAM disc will erase everything recorded o n it. Make sure there is nothing on the disc that you want to keep! • You may not be a ble to re-initialize a DVD-RW disc in a different f o rmat if it was origi nally initiali zed on an older D VD recor der. • Once initialized for VR mode rec ording, you can’t r e-initialize a DVD-R bac k to Video mode. 1 Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the Home Menu. 2 Select ‘Initi alize’ > ‘Video Mode’, ‘VR Mode’ or ‘Initia lize DVD RW’. 3 Select ‘Start’. It takes about 30 seconds to initialize the disc (except DVD-RAM discs, which can take up to an hour). DVD-RW Auto Initialize •D e f a u l t s e t t i n g : VR Mode Initializati on mode is aut omatically ca rried out when you insert a bla nk DVD-RW. You must set the desired initial ization mode before inserting a disc. 1 Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the Home Menu. 2 Select ‘Basic’>’DVD-RW Auto Init.’, th en ‘VR Mod e’ or ‘Vide o Mode’. HOME MENU ENTER Basic Initialize Finalize Optimize HDD Disc Setup VR Mode Video Mode Initialize DVD RW Start Start Start Initialize ENTER Initializing Disc 1 min left 2ch DVD-RW HOME MENU ENTER Basic Initialize Finalize Optimize HDD Disc Setup Input Disc Name Basic VR Mode Video Mode Lock Disc DVD-RW Auto Init. DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 50 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Playback 51 En 06 Chapter 6 Playback Introduction Most of the features de scribed in t his chapter make use of on-screen displays. Navigate these using the cursor buttons an d ENTER . To go back one level from any screen, use the RETURN button. Remember also that the button guide at the bottom of every screen shows which buttons do what. Many of the fun ctions covered in this chapter apply to the HDD, DVD discs, Vi deo CDs, Super VCDs, WMA/MP 3/DivX discs and CDs, altho ugh the exact oper ation of some varies slightly with the kind of disc loaded. • Many functio ns are not availa ble when a Video CD is playing in PBC mode. Start playback from the Disc Navigator screen for non-PBC playback (see Using the Disc Navigato r with playback-only disc s on page 56). • For discs th at contain JPEG pict ure files, see The Ph otoViewe r on page 94. Important • Unless otherwise stat e d, the OSDs shown in t his manual are fo r the Taiwan and Phili ppines model. Basic playback This section shows yo u how to use you r recorder for playback of discs (DVD, CD, etc.), and for playback of video from the HDD. Important • Throug hout this manua l, the term ‘DVD’ means a ny kin d of play able or record able DVD. If a functio n is specific to a particular kind of DVD disc, it is specified. • Some DVD-Video, DVD R and DVD RW discs don’t allow certain playback controls to opera te at certain points in the disc. This is not a malfunction . 1 Select the HDD or DVD for playback. If playing vi deo from th e HDD, skip to step 3 below. Select DVD for any kind of disc playba ck. 2 Load a disc. Load a disc with the label side facing up , using the disc tray guid e to align the disc (if you’re loading a doubl e-sided DVD-Video disc, load it with the side you want to play face down). • If you want to play a D TS Audio CD, please first read the no te on page 53. 3 Start playback. • If you’re playing a DVD-Video or Video CD, a disc menu may a ppear when you start playback. Use the /// buttons, number buttons, and ENTER to navigate DVD disc menus, and the number buttons and ENTER for Video CD menus. • The Disc Navigator i s automatically displayed for WMA/M P3 files and Audio CDs (see Using the Disc Navigator with playback-only discs on page 56). • When playin g video from the HDD, playback will automatically stop after the end of a title is reached. • There ma y be a slight pa use when playback switches from the first to the second layer of a dual-layer disc. • See the following sections for more details on playing specific kinds of discs. ALL HDD DVD OPEN/CLOSE  PLAY DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 51 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Playback 06 52 En 4 Press to stop playback. 5 When you’v e finished using the recorder, eject the disc and switc h the recorder back into standby. Playing DVD discs The table below shows the basic playback controls for DVD-Video, and re cordable DVD discs. Playing from the HDD The table below shows the basic playback controls when playing video recorded on the hard disk (HDD). P ress to start playback. If RESUME is displayed on- screen, playback starts from the place last stopped. Pr e s s t o s t o p p l a y b a c k . Y ou can resume playback from the same point by pressing  PLAY . (P ress  STOP again to cancel the resume function.) P auses playback, or restarts playback when paused. P ress to start scanning. P ress repeatedly to increase the scanning speed. P ress to skip to previous/next chapter/title. (During playback you can also use the front panel CH /– buttons.) DVD R/DVD RW only:  PREV may not always skip to the previous title. Except VR mode: During playback, enter a chapter number then pr ess ENTER to skip directly to that chapter within the currently playing title. On some discs, you can also use the number buttons to select numbered items in the disc menu. VR mode only: During playback , enter a title number then press ENTER . All: P ress CL EAR to clear a number entr y and start again. STOP PLAY STOP PAU SE REV SCAN FWD SCAN PREV NEXT ABC DEF GHI JKL MNO PQRS TUV WXYZ CLEAR CLEAR ENTER (Commercial back/skip) Ea ch press skips backward/forward progressively up to a maximum of two hours in either direction . P ress to start slow-motion playback. P ress repeatedly to change the playback speed. While paused, press to advance a single frame in either direction. P ress to display the menu of a DVD- Video disc. (DVD R/ RW discs finalized on this recorder will display the Disc Navigator . Pr e s s MENU to display the disc menu.) Use the cursor buttons to navigate DVD - Video disc menus; press ENTER to select items. P ress to return to the previous level of a DVD- Video disc men u. P ress to start playback. If RESUME is displayed on- screen, pla yback star ts from the place last stopped. Playback automatically stops after the end of a title is reached. P ress to stop playback. Y ou can resume playback from the same point by pressing  PLAY . (P ress  STOP again to cancel the resume function.) P auses playback, or restarts playback when paused. P ress to start scanning. P ress repeatedly to increase the scanning speed. CM BACK SKIP STEP/SLOW TOP MENU DISC NAVIGA TOR MENU ENTER RETURN PLAY STOP PAU SE REV SCAN FWD SCAN DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 52 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Playback 53 En 06 Playing CDs and WMA/MP3 discs The table below shows the basic playback controls for Audio CDs 1 , and WMA/MP3 files. Playing Video CD/Super VCDs The table below shows the basic playback controls for Video CD/Sup er VCDs. Some discs feat ure Pl ayback Control (PBC for short) menus. These discs show PBC in the display when you load them and display a menu on-screen from where you can select what to watch. 2 P ress to skip to previous/next chapter/title. (During playback you can also use the front panel CH /– buttons.) During playback, enter a title number then press ENTER to skip directly to that title. Pr e s s CLEAR to clear a n umber entr y and start again . (Commercial back/skip) Each press skips backward/forward progressively up to a maximum of two hours in either direction. P ress to start slow-motion playback. P ress repeatedly to change the playback speed. While paused, press to advance a single frame in either direction. Note 1 I f you want to play a DTS Audio CD, make sure the rec o rder is connected to a DTS- compatible amplifier/rece iver with a digital connection. Noise will be output th rough the analog outputs. Also make sure that STEREO is selected using the AUDIO button (see Switching audio channels on page 61). P ress to start playback. Pr e s s t o s t o p p l a y b a c k . P auses playback, or restarts playback when paused. PREV NEXT ABC DEF GHI JKL MNO PQRS TUV WXYZ CLEAR CLEAR ENTER CM BACK SKIP STEP/SLOW PLAY STOP PAU SE P ress to start scanning. P ress again to increase the scanning speed. (There are two scan speeds; the current scan speed is shown on-screen.) P ress to skip to previous/next track. P ress to start playback. Vide o CD only: If RESUME is displayed on-screen, p l ayback starts from the place last stopped. P ress to stop playback. Vide o CD only: Y ou can resume playback from the same point by pressing  PLAY . (Press  STOP again to cancel the resume function.) P auses playback, or restarts playback when paused. P ress to start scanning. P ress repeatedly to increase the scanning speed. P ress to skip to previous/next track. When a PBC menu is displayed, press to display the previous/ next page. (During playback you can also use the front panel CH /– buttons.) 2 When playing in PBC mode, some playback features, such as search, repeat and programme play are not available. You can play a PBC Video CD/Super VCD in non-PBC mode by starting playback using the Disc Navigator (see Using the Disc Navigator wi th playback-o nly discs on page 56). REV SCAN FWD SCAN PREV NEXT PLAY STOP PAU SE REV SCAN FWD SCAN PREV NEXT DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 53 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Playback 06 54 En Playing DivX video files The table below shows the basic playback controls for DivX video files. During playback, enter a track number then press ENTER to skip directly to that track. Pr e s s CLEAR to clear a n umber entr y and start again . While a PBC menu screen is displayed, use to select numbered menu items. (Commercial back/skip) Each press skips backward/forward progressively up to a maximum of two hours in either direction. Note that this function doesn’t work when playing in PBC mode. P ress to start slow-motion playback. P ress repeatedly to change the playback speed (forward only). While paused, press to advance a single frame (forward only). P ress to display the disc menu of a V i deo CD/Super VCD playing in PBC mode. ABC DEF GHI JKL MNO PQRS TUV WXYZ CLEAR CLEAR ENTER CM BACK SKIP STEP/SLOW RETURN P ress to start playback. If RESUME is displayed on- screen, pla yback star ts from the place last stopped. Playback of titles (DivX files) proceeds in alphabetical order . P ress to stop playback. Y ou can resume playback from the same point by pressing  PLAY . (P ress  STOP again to cancel the resume function.) P auses playback, or restarts playback when paused. P ress to start scanning. P ress repeatedly to increase the scanning speed. P ress to skip to previous/next title. (During playback you can also use the front panel CH /– buttons.) P ress to start slow motion playback (press repeatedly to change the slow motion play speed). While paused, press to advance one frame. P ress to display the playback audio type; press repeatedly to change the playback audio type. P ress to display subtitle information; press repeatedly to change subtitles. PLAY STOP PAU SE REV SCAN FWD SCAN PREV NEXT STEP/SLOW AUDIO SUBTITLE DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 54 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Playback 55 En 06 Using the Disc Na vigator with recordable discs and the HDD You can us e the Disc N avigator to br owse and edit video on recordable DVDs and the HDD, and to view information on titles. See also Editing on page 67 for more on editing recordable discs. 1 Select the HDD or DVD. 2 Open the Disc Navigato r. • You can also access the Disc Navigator from the Home Menu . 3 Browse the list of titles. •U s e t h e  PRE V / NEXT buttons to display the previous/next page of titles. • To change the thum bnail picture displayed for a title see Set Thumbnail on page 72. • For HDD record ings, you should be able to see a thumbnail title digest. If i t doesn’t display, set Set Preview to Normal . See Set Prev iew on page 1 18. 4 Play the high lighted title. • You can al so select Play from the comman d menu opti ons. Changing the display style of the Disc Navigator You can choose to display titles in the Di sc Navigator in variou s di fferent ways, sorted alphabet ically, by record ing date, by genre, and so on . You can al so choose whether to display four or eight titles on the screen at the same time. 1 Displ ay the view optio ns panel. 2 Choose ‘ Style’, ‘Sort order’ or ‘Genre’, then press ENTER to see the available vi ew options. • Style – Select four or eight titl es per screen view • Sort order – Sort by date (most recent first), unwatched fi rst, title name or recording date (oldest f irst) • Genre – Display all genre s or just a selected genre 3 Choose a view op tion, then press ENTER. The title list disp lay is updated according to the new display preferences. DVD-R DVD-RW DVD R DVD RW DVD-RAM HDD HDD DVD DISC NAVIGA TOR Disc Navigator (HDD) 11/29 MON 7: 00PM 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 1 4 Titles Remain HDD SP Recent first All Genres 10Titles 30h30m MENU 12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP 12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 12/02 SA T 10:00PM 7ch SP 12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 12/03 SUN 11:00PM 4ch SP 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 9 8 7 10 ENTER Disc Navigator (HDD) 11/29 MON 7:00PM 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 1 2 3 7 4 Titles Remain NEW first All Genres 10Titles 30h30m HDD SP MENU 1 4 Titles Sort order Recent first Genre All Genres Style The view options panel 12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP 12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 12/02 SA T 10:00PM 7ch SP 12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 12/03 SUN 11:00PM 4ch SP 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) ENTER ENTER DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 55 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Playback 06 56 En Using the Disc Navigator with playback-only discs Use the Disc Navigator to browse the contents of a disc an d start playback. 1 Select DVD. 2 Display th e Home Menu. 3 Select ‘Dis c Navigator’. Alternatively, for a Video CD or Super VCD , you can press DISC NAVIGATOR , which takes you straight to the Disc Navigator screen. 4 Select what you want to play . Depending on the ty pe of disc you have loaded, the Disc Navigator looks slightly different, but the y are all navigated in the same way. The screen below shows a Video CD. Navigate to the trac k/chapter/titl e that you want to play. Playback starts after you p ress ENTER . 1 Select DVD. 2 Open the Disc Navigato r. • The Disc Navigator is also accessible from the Home Menu . • Proceed to step 4 when p layin g back an Audio CD . 3 Select a folder that contain s the tracks or titles y ou want to play back. 4 Select what you want to play. Playback starts after you press ENTER . •U s e t h e SUBTITLE / ANGLE buttons to display the previous/next page of folders/ tracks/titles . • You can also select Play from the command menu options. • For discs th at contain CD audio tracks and WMA/MP3 tracks or DivX titl es, you can switc h the playback area betwee n CD , WMA/MP3 and DivX . Playback stops if you switch the playback area during playback. See Changi ng the display sty le of the Disc Navigator on page 57. Reloading files from a WMA/MP3 disc When this unit reload s a WMA/MP3 disc with over 1000 files or over 100 folders, the files and folders are displayed in the Disc Navigator. 1 Navigate to th e last entry in the folder list (‘R ead next: ... ’). 2 Load the next batch of up to 999 files/99 folders from the disc. DVD-Video Video CD Super VCD DVD HOME MENU ENTER ENTER Video CD Disc Navigator T rack (01-99) T otal 0.50.50 T rack01 T rack02 T rack03 T rack04 T rack05 T rack06 T rack07 T rack08 T rack01 CD WMA/MP3 DivX DVD DISC NAVIGA TOR HDD CD T rack 0 1 650MB 0.04.30 / 1.14.00 (None) T rack 0 3 0.05.30 T rack Repeat Stereo 3 10.00.00 100.0 G Remain Disc Navigator (DVD/CD) 2 T rack 02 3 T rack 03 4 T rack 04 5 T rack 05 6 T rack 06 7 T rack 07 8 T rack 08 1 T rack 01 T rack List 10 T racks MENU ENTER ENTER ENTER DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 56 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Playback 57 En 06 It takes several minutes for files to be reloaded. 1 Changing the display style of the Disc Navigator You can d isplay titl es by data fo rmat or by folder/track. 1 Display the view o ptions panel. 2 Choose ‘Data Format’ or ‘Display Mode’ , then press ENTER to see the available vi ew options. • Data Format CD – Displays tracks on an Audio CD. WMA/MP3 – Displays WMA/M P3 folders o r tracks. DivX – Displays DivX folders or titles. • Display Mod e Folder – Switches to th e folder display for WMA/MP3 or DivX files. Track – Switches to the track display for WMA/MP3 files. Title – Switches t o the title d isplay for DivX f iles. 3 Choose a view op tion, then press ENTER. The title list disp lay is updated according to the new display preferences. Scanning discs You can scan discs at various speeds, forwards or backwards. 2 1 During playback, sta rt reverse or forward scanning. • The scanning speed is shown on-screen. 2 Press repeatedly to ch ange the scanning spee d. There are four scanning speeds availa ble when playing HDD video, a DVD or a DivX title. Reverse playback is also possible with HDD and DVD -Video. 3 There are two scanning speeds for other types of disc. 3 Resume normal playback. Playing in slow motion You can pl ay video at vari ous slow motion speeds. DVDs and video on t h e HDD can be played in slow motion in either dire ction, while Video CDs/Super VCDs and D ivX titles can only be played forwards in slow motion. There is no sound when playing in slo w motion. Note 1 Y ou can press HOME MENU to exit the Disc Navigator screen while the rec order is reloading files. HDD CD TRACK1 WMA 999MB TRACK3 0.05.30 T rack Repeat Stereo 3 10.00.00 100.0 G Remain Disc Navigator (DVD/CD) 002 TRACK2 003 TRACK3 004 TRACK4 005 TRACK5 006 TRACK6 007 TRACK7 008 TRACK8 001 TRACK1 T rack List MENU 10 T racks WMA/MP3 Display Mode T rack Data Format The view options panel ENTER 2 • No subtitles are displayed when scanning DVDs and DivX titles. • No sound is out put when scanning from the HDD, DVDs and DivX, except on forward SCA N 1 . • Depending on the disc, normal playback may automati cally resume when a new chapter is reached on a DVD disc. 3 Reverse p lay back may not be smooth. ENTER ALL REV SCAN FWD SCAN REV SCAN FWD SCAN PLAY DVD HDD Video CD Super VCD DivX DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 57 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Playback 06 58 En 1 Press to start slow motion reverse or forw ard play. 2 Press repeatedly to c hange the slow motion speed. The current playback speed is indic ated on- screen. 3 Resume normal pla yback. Frame advance/frame reverse You can a dvance or b ack up vide o on a DVD disc 1 or the HDD frame-by-fra me. With Video CDs/Super VCDs and DivX titles, you can only use fr ame advance. 1 Pause playba ck. 2 Back up o r advance one frame with each press. 3 Resume normal pla yback. The Play Mode menu The Play Mode menu gives you access to search functions, repeat and programme play fu nctions. • P ress to display th e Play Mode menu. • You can also access the Play Mode menu from the Home Menu (press HOME M ENU ). • Select Play Mo de from the command menu for Audio CDs, WMA/MP3 files, or DivX 2 files by pressing  in the Disc Navigator. • To exit the Play Mode menu, press HOME M ENU or PLAY MODE . Search Mode The Search Mode feature l ets you start playback f rom a specified p oint in a disc by time 3 or by titl e/chapter/tra ck number. 1 Select ‘Search Mode ’ from the Play Mode menu, then ch oose a search option. The available search options depend on the type of disc. 2 Enter a title/chapter/track number or a search ti me. Note 1 Depending on the disc, normal playback may au tomatically resume when a new chapter is reac hed. STEP/SLOW STEP/SLOW PLAY DVD HDD Video CD Super VCD DivX PAU SE STEP/SLOW PLAY ALL 2 For DivX files, sele ct Play Mode in the Disc Navigator whi le playback is stopped and in the Home Menu during playback respectiv ely. 3 When using time search, playback may occasionally start slightly before or after the time you input. PLAY MODE Time Search Title Search Chapter Search Play Mode Search Mode A-B Repeat Repeat Programme DVD HDD Video CD Super VCD DivX ENTER ABC DEF GHI JKL MNO PQRS TUV WXYZ CLEAR CLEAR Time Search Title Search Chapter Search Play Mode Search Mode A-B Repeat Repeat Programme Input Time 0.01.00 DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 58 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Playback 59 En 06 Time Search (HDD, DVD): For exa mple, for 25 minutes into the current title, press 2 , 5 , 0 , 0 . For 1 hour a nd 15 minutes and 20 seconds into the title, press 1 , 1 , 5 , 2 , 0 . Time Search (Video CD): For example, for 2 minutes and 30 seconds into the current track, press 2 , 3 , 0 . Title/Chapter/Track Search: For example, for track 6, press 6 . 3 Start playback. A-B Repeat The A-B Repeat fun ction allows you to specify tw o points (A and B) within a track or title that form a loop which is played over and over. 1 1 During playb ack, select ‘A-B Repeat’ from the Play Mod e menu. 2 With ‘A (Loop Start)’ highligh ted, press at the point you want the loop to start. 3 With ‘B (L oop End)’ highli ghted, press at the point you want the loop to end. Playback immediately jumps bac k to the start point and plays the l oop round and round. • When playing a DVD-Video, DVD-R/-RW (Video mode), DVD R/ RW, or from the HDD, the start and end points of the loop must be in the same title. • To resu me normal play back, select Off from the A-B Rep eat menu, or press CLEAR if no menu OS D (such as the Play Mode menu) is displayed. Repeat play There are various repeat play option s, depending on the kind of disc loaded, o r if you’re using the HDD for playback. It’s also possible to use repeat play together with programme pl ay to repeat t he tracks/ chapters in t he programme list (see Programme play below). 2 • Select ‘Repeat’ from the Play Mode menu, th en choose a repeat play mode. • To resu me normal play back, select Repeat Off f r o m t h e R e p e a t P l a y m e n u , or press CLEAR if no menu OSD (suc h as the Play Mode menu) is displayed. Programme play This feature lets you program the play order of titles/chapters 3 /folders/tracks on a disc or the HDD. Note 1 I f you switch camera angles on a DVD during A-B rep eat play, A-B repeat is cancelled. ENTER DVD HDD CD Video CD DivX ENTER ENTER Play Mode Search Mode A-B Repeat Repeat Programme A (Loop Start) B (Loop End) Off ENTER 2 I f you switch the camera angle during repeat play of a DVD-Video disc, repeat play is cancelled. 3 When playing a programme list of DVD-Video chapters, chapters not included in the programme list may be sometimes be played, depending on the disc. ALL ENTER Play Mode Search Mode A-B Repeat Repeat Programme Repeat Title Repeat Chapter Repeat Off HDD DVD-Video CD Video CD Super VCD WMA/MP3 DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 59 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Playback 06 60 En 1 Select ‘Programme’ from the Play Mode menu, then ‘In put/Edit Programme’. The Input/Edit Programm e screen varies according to the disc type. Below i s the DVD input screen. 2 Select a title, chapter, folder or track for the cu rrent step in the programme list. After pressing ENTER to add the title/ chapter/folder/track, the step number automatically moves down one . • To insert a step in to the programme list, highlight the step number where you want to insert another step, then s e lect a chapter/title/folder/trac k as usual. After pressing ENTE R , all the subsequent steps move down one. • To delete a step from the programme list, highlight the step you want to delete, then press CLEAR . 3 Repeat step 2 to build up a programme list. A programme list can co ntain up to 24 titles/ chapters/folders/track s. 4 Play the programme list. Programme play remains active un til you cancel programme play, erase the programme list, eject th e disc or switch off the rec order. Tip • To save your programm e list and exit the programme edit screen without starting playback, press HOME MENU or PLAY MODE . • During programme p lay, press  NEXT to skip to the next programme step. • To repeat play the programm e list, select Repeat Programme from the Repeat Play Mode menu (see R epeat play on page 59). • Except CD, WMA/MP3 : Press CLEAR during playback to swit ch off programme play (if no menu OSD, such as the Disc Naviga tor, is displayed). Press while stopped to erase the programme list. • From the Programme me nu you can also: Start Progra mme Play – Starts playback of a saved programme list Cancel Pr ogramme Play – Turns off programme play, but does not erase th e programme list Erase Programme List – Erases the programme list and turns off programme play Displaying and switching subtitles Some DVD a nd DivX disc s have subtit les in one or more languages; the disc box will usually te ll you which sub title languag es are available. You can swi tch subtit le language during playback. 1 Check the disc packaging for details of the subtitle o ptions. ENTER Programme Step 01.001 02. 03. 04. 05. 06. 07. 08. Title (01-03) Title 01 Title 02 Title 03 Chapter(001-015) Chapter 001 Chapter 002 Chapter 003 Chapter 004 Chapter 005 Chapter 006 Chapter 007 Chapter 008 ENTER PLAY Note 1 • Som e discs only allow you to change su btitle language from the disc menu. Press MENU or TOP MENU to access. • To set subtitle preferences, see Subtitle La nguage on page 113. DVD-Video DivX DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 60 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Playback 61 En 06 • Select/change the sub t itl e language . The current subtitle language is shown o n- screen and in the fro nt panel display. • To switch off subtitles, press SUBTITLE then CLEAR . Switching DVD and DivX soundtracks When playing a DVD disc or DivX title recorded with two or m ore soundtracks (often in different langua ges), you can switch the soundtrack during playback. 1 Check the disc packaging f o r details of th e soundtrack options. • Change the audio s oundtrack. The current audio language is shown on- screen and in the fro nt panel display. • The sound ma y drop out for a few seconds when switching soundtracks. • Some discs feature both Dolby Digital and DTS soundtracks. There is no analog audio output when DTS is selected. To listen to the DTS soundtrack, connect this recorder to a DTS decoder or AV amplif ier/receiver with built-in D TS decoder via the digital output. See Connecting to an AV amplifier or recei v er on page 20 for connection details. Switching audio channels Taiwan and Philippines mode l: For HDD 2 and VR mode content that has both a main an d a SA P (Secondary Audio Programme) audio channel, you can switch between main ( L ), SAP ( R ), or both ( L R ). 3 Other: For HDD 2 and VR mode content recorded with bilingual au dio, you can switch b etween left ( L ) channel, right ( R ) channel, or bo th ( L R ). 3 When playing Video CDs and Audio CDs you can switch between stereo, just the left channel or ju st the right cha nnel. Some Super VCDs have two soun dtracks. With these discs you can switch between the two soundtrack s as well as individual channel s in each. • Press repeatedly to disp lay/ switch the audi o channel. The audio channel(s) currently playing ar e indicated o n-screen. Taiwan and Philippines mode l: L R – Both channels (def ault) L – Left/main channel only R – Right/SAP channel only Other: L R – Both channels (def ault) L – Left channel only R – Right channel only Note 1 • Som e discs only allow you to change audio language from the disc menu. Press MENU or TOP ME NU to access. • To set audio language preferences, see Aud io Language on p age 112. SUBTITLE DVD-Video DivX AUDIO 2 Only when H DD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off ( HDD Recording Format on page 115). 3 When p laying a dual mono recording/b ilingual recording on a VR mode disc , if you are listening to the Dolby Digital soundtrack via the digital output , yo u cannot switch the audio channel. Set Do lby Digital Out to Dolby Digital  PCM (see Dolby Digital Out on page 111) or listen via the analog outputs if you need to switch the audio channel. DVD ( VR) DVD-RAM HDD CD Video CD Super VCD WMA/MP3 AUDIO HDD DVD ( VR) DVD-RAM DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 61 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Playback 06 62 En Stereo – Stereo (default) 1/L – Left channel only 2/R – Right channel only 1 Stereo – Soundtr ack 1/Stereo (default) 1 L – Soundtrack 1/Left channel 1 R – Soundtrack 1/Right channel 2 Stereo – Soundtrack 2/Stereo 2 L – Soundtrack 2/Left channel 2 R – Soundtrack 2/Right channel Switching camera angles Some DVD-Video discs feature scenes shot from two or more a ngles — check the disc box for d etails: it shou ld be marked with a icon if it contains multi-a ngle scenes. When a multi-angle scene is playin g, the same icon appears on screen to let you know that other angl es are available (th is can be switched off if you prefer — see Angle Indicator on page 116). • Switch the camera angl e. • The angle number is displa yed on- screen. • If the disc was paused, playback starts again with the new angle. Displaying disc information on-screen You can display various o n-screen information about th e disc loaded or the HDD. • Display/change the on-screen information. • Press once to show the HDD and removable disc (DVD, etc.) activity together. Press again to show the status of just the currently selected playback/ recording device (HDD or removable disc). • To hide the information displa y, press DISPLAY rep eatedly until it dis appears. HDD and removable disc activity display Press DISPLAY once to see the HDD and removable disc (DVD, etc.) activity. Use the HDD and DVD bu tton to swit ch between th e two kinds of display. The example displays below sh ow high- speed cop ying from HD D to DVD, and HD D chase playb ack. CD Video CD WMA/MP3 Super VCD DVD-Video ANGLE DISPLAY Re c Mode SP(2h00m/DVD) HDD Remain 10h35m Stop Remain –h––m Stop Hi-Speed Copy HDD DVD 0h08m left DVD-RW Video Re c Mode SP(2h00m/DVD) HDD Remain 10h35m Cha se Play Re c Remain 0h52m Stop DVD-RW Video Relative pla yback position Recording time Stop DVD-RW VR Original Disc Name : Comedy shows Finalized Resume XP (1h00m/DVD) Rem. 0h35m Copy Once Stereo WNBC Shows recording restrictions for the current channel programme  Play DVD-R Video Title Name 11/21 S occer game : Chapter T otal  Chapter Time 3–2 0. 00. 15 ! 0. 00. 21 0h01m52s 4.32Mbps Indicates copy-protected material Indicates a multi-angle scene Indicates the data transfer ra te DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 62 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Playback 63 En 06 Tip • See Switching came ra angles on page 62 for more on multi-angle scene switching. • When using the simulta neous play and record featur e, the display shows information for pl ayback only. • During real -time copy, the copy source playback information is displayed. • The Video mode DVD-R/-RW displays become the same as a DVD-Video disc once th e disc is fina lized. • The total recording time figu re shown in parenthesis is calculated based on a 12 cm/4.7 GB disc at the displayed recor d setti ng. • Recording and playback times for TV recordings are appro ximately 0.1 % shorter than the actual time. This is because of the slight ly different frame rates of TV broa dcasts versus DVD. • The frame nu mber is shown next to th e elapsed time display when the disc is paused . • Copy Once or Can’t Record messages may appear in the stop or recording displays. These in dicate that the broadcast TV programme contains copy control informa tion. DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 63 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Playing and recording from a DV ca mcorder 07 64 En Chapter 7 Playing and recording from a DV camcorder You can play back and record vi deo from a DV camco rder connected to the DV IN ja ck on the front panel of this recorder. Important • If you connect a second recorder using a DV cable, you cannot control the sec ond unit from this one . • You can’t control th is unit remotely from a component connected to the DV I N jack. Playing from a DV camcorder 1 Make sure your DV camcorde r is connected to the front panel DV IN jack. 2 From the Initial Setup menu, check that the DV audio inpu t is setup as you would lik e. See DV Input on page 111 for mo re on this. • Check also that the Audio In settings for External Audio and Dual Mono Recording/Bilingual Recording are as you want them (see Audio In on page 110). 3 Select ‘DV’ , then ‘DV Video Playback’ from th e Home Menu. 4 Start playback on the camcorder. Images from the camc order should appear on your TV. • To record th e incoming video, use th e HDD and DVD button to selec t the HDD or a DVD for recor ding, then press  REC . Press F ST OP REC to finish recording. If there is no sign al from the device connected to the DV ja ck, or the signal is copy-prote cted, recordin g will pause. It will automatically restart o nce there is a recordable signal. • The recorde r will only start recording from t he DV IN jack if there is a valid signal. Reco rding will pause if the signal is interrupted during recording. • If your source i s copy-protected u sing Copy Guard, you will not be able to record it. See Re strictions on vid eo recording on page 34 for more details. Recording from a DV camcorder • The source signal mu st be DVC-SD format . • You can’t record date and time information from DV cassette. • During DV recording, if a part of the ta pe is blank, or has copy -protected material on it, this recorde r will pause recording. Recordin g will restart automatically when there is a reco rdable signal. However, if there is more than two minutes of bla nk tape, this recorder will stop recording and the c amcorder should stop (depending on the camcorder). Copying from a DV source Using the recorder’s remote, you ca n control both the camcorder and this recorder. Important • Some ca mcorders cannot b e controlled using this recorder’s remo te. • For best results when recording from a DV camcorder to this r ecorder, we recommend cueing th e camcorder to the place you want to sta rt recording from and setting the camcorder to play-p ause. HOME MENU DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 64 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Playing and recording from a DV ca mcorder 65 En 07 1 Make sure your DV camcorde r is connected to the front panel DV IN jack. Also, set the camcorder to VTR mode. 2 Set the recording qu ality. • See Setting the picture quality/recording time on page 36 for detailed in formation. 3 From the Initial Setup menu, check that the DV audio inpu t is setup as you would lik e. See DV Input on page 111 for mo re on this. • Check also that the Audio In settings for External Audio and Dual Mono Recording/Bi lingual Recording ar e as you want them (see Audio In on page 110). 4 Select ‘DV’, then ‘Copy from a DV Source’ from the Home Menu. • DV recording only works when the DV camco rder is in VT R mode wit h a tape loaded. 5 Select ‘Record to Hard Disk Drive’ o r ‘Record t o DVD’. 6 Find the place o n the camcor der tape that you want to start recording from. For best results, pause playback at the point from which yo u want to record. • Depending on you r camcorder, you can use this recorder’s re mote to control the camcor der using the  ,  ,  ,  ,  ,  and  buttons. 7 Select ‘Start Rec’. • You can p ause or stop the recordin g by selecting Pause Rec or Stop Rec fro m the on-screen display. You cann ot control the camcorder from thi s rem ote control during recording. • If you resta rt recording af ter stopping th e camcorder, th e first few seconds of the camcorder tape will not be rec orded. Use the pause button on y our camcorder instead and recording will start immediately. • HDD, DVD (VR Mode) and DVD- RAM only: A chapter marker is inserted every time there is a break in the timecode on the DV tape. This happens when the recording is stopp ed or paused then restarted, for ex ample. • If you don’t want to see the DV recordin g screen during recording, press DISPLAY to hide it (press again to displa y). • While recording, you cannot exit the DV recording screen using the HO ME MENU or RETURN button. DV Auto Copy DV Auto Copy allows you to make a n exact copy of the co ntents of a DV sou rce to the HDD or a DVD. 1 Make sure you r DV camcorder is connected to the front panel DV IN jack. Also, set the camcorder to VTR mode. 2 Set the recording qu ality. • See Setting the p icture quality/recording time on page 36 for detailed info rmation. 3 From the Initia l Setup menu, check that the DV audio i nput is setup as you require. See DV Input on page 111 for more on this. • Check also that the Audio In settings for External Audio and Dual Mono Recording/Bi lingual Recording are as you want th em (see Audio In on page 110). 4 Select ‘DV’, then ‘DV Auto Copy’ from the Home Menu. • DV recording o nly works when the DV camcorder is in VTR mode w ith a tape loaded. REC MODE HOME MENU ENTER ENTER Start Rec Pause Rec Stop Rec SP (2h00m/DVD) 32h45m  Stop  Stop 1.02.22 Control with these buttons       Rem. HDD REC MODE HOME MENU DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 65 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Playing and recording from a DV ca mcorder 07 66 En 5 Select ‘Record to Hard Disk Drive’ o r ‘Record t o DVD’. The DV tape is rewound to the beginning. Once it is rewound, the DV tape is played from the beginning and co pied to either the HDD or a D VD. • If there is a gap of two minutes or more between recorded contents, the copying process is automatically stopped. • Once c opying is fini shed, the DV tape is automati cally rewou nd. • To cancel the copying process, press F STOP REC for more tha n three seconds. About automatic finalization If you use a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R/ RW disc for copying, it will automatically be finalized af ter copying is complete. • You can’t customize the backgr ound for DVD-R/-RW or DVD R/ RW disc finaliza tion. • No title names are assigned. • If you want to give the disc a name, please do so before you start the copy (see Input Disc Name on page 102). • If a timer recording is scheduled to start , and in some other instances, the disc will not b e finalized. Frequently Aske d Questions • I can’t get my DV camcorder to work with the recorder! Check that the DV cable is properly connected. Also make sure that what you’re trying to record is not cop y- protected. If it still doesn’t work, try switchi ng off the camcorder then switch back on. • There’s a pictu re, but no sound! Try switching the DV Input setting (see DV Input on page 111) between Stereo 1 and Stereo 2 . 1 About DV Using DV, also known as i.LINK or IEEE 1394- 1995, you can co nnect a DV camco rder to this reco rder using a DV cable for in put of audio, video, data and control signals. “i.LINK” and the “i.LINK” logo are trademarks. • This record er is only compat ible with DV- format (DVC-SD) camcorders. Digital satellite recei vers and Digital VHS video recorders are n ot compatible. • You canno t connect m ore than one DV camcorder at a tim e to this recorder. • You canno t control thi s recorder from external equipment connected via the DV IN jack. • It may not always be possible to control the connected camcorder via the DV IN jack. • DV camc orders can us ually record a udio as stereo 16-bit/48 kHz, o r twin stereo tracks of 12-bit/32 kHz. This recorder can only record one stereo audio track. Set the DV Input s etting as require d (see DV Input on page 111). • Audio input to the DV IN jack shoul d be 32 kHz or 48 kHz (not 4 4.1 kHz). • Picture disturbance in the recording may occur if the source compo nent pauses playback or plays an unreco rded section of tape, or if the power fa ils in the source compo nent, or the DV cable is disconnected. •T h e DV IN jack is an input only. There is no output fu nctionality. ENTER Note 1 If the audio subcode on the DV tape cannot be read correctly, the audio ty pe will not switch automatically. You can switch the a udio manually from the External Audio setting (page 110). DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 66 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Editing 67 En 08 Chapter 8 Editing Editing options The table below shows which comm ands you can use with the HDD and dif ferent disc types. *1 DVD-R/-RW only HDD DVD-R /-RW (Video mode), DVD R/ RW DVD-R/-RW, DVD-RAM (VR mode) Original Play List Create (page 69)  Play (page 69)    Erase (page 69)    Edit > Title Nam e (page 70)    Edit > Set Thumbnail (page 72)    Edit > Erase Section (page 72)   Edit > Divide (page 73)  Edit > Chapter Edit (page 73)   Edit > Set Genre (page 74)  Edit > Lock (page 75)   Edit > Move (page 75)  Edit > Combin e (page 76)  Genre Name (page 76)  Multi-Mod e (page 77)  Undo (page 78)  *1  *1 DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 67 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Editing 08 68 En The Disc Navigator screen The Disc Navigator screen is where you can edit video content on unfinalized Video mode and DVD-R/-RW (VR mode) discs, DVD R/ RW and DVD-RA M, as well as video content on the hard disk drive. Important • Unless otherwise stat e d, the OSDs shown in t his manual are fo r the Taiwan and Phili ppines model. • Titles that have been recorded with a Input Line System setting different to the current setting of the recorder are shown in the Disc Navigator with a blank thumbnail image. See also Additional information about the TV system sett ings on page 119. • During recording, if you display the Disc Navigator for the H DD, some of the titles may appear with a mark. These titles were recorded with a Input Lin e System setting different to t he current setting of the recorder. Durin g recording, these titles cannot be played . 1 Select the HDD or DVD. 2 Display the Disc Navigato r screen. Playback will automati cally stop when yo u do this. • The Disc Navigator is also accessible from the Home Menu . • Press to display the command menu panel. Use the / and ENTER buttons to navigate the menus. • When in the title list, press to display the previo us/next page if there are more titles than can be displa yed. • Press to change the ti tle informa tion displa yed in the titl e list. • Press to switch between the HDD and DVD Disc Navigator screens. • If you are editing a DVD-R/-RW (VR mode) or DVD-RAM disc you can display the Play List by sele cting Play List from the view options panel (press  , then select Play List from the view options, then Play List ). • Titles on the H DD marked with a icon are recently recorded titles tha t haven’t yet been played. 3 Press to exit the Disc Navigator. Editing accuracy Some editing commands ask you whe ther you want to keep Video mode co mpatibility or frame ac curacy ( Video Mode Com patible Editing or Frame Accurate Editing ). Frame Accurate Editing is very precise. The edit point is accurate to the exact frame you choose. However, this a ccuracy is not preserved in any copy yo u make if you use the high-speed copy func tion to make a DVD-R /-RW (Vi deo mo de) or DVD R/ RW. Video Mod e Compatible Ed iting is le ss precise. The edit point you choose will o nly be accurate to within one-half to one second. On the other han d, these edit points will be HDD DVD DISC NAVIGA TOR Disc Navigator (HDD) 4 Titles Remain Recent first All Genres 10Titles 30h30m 11/29 MON 7:00PM 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 1 9 8 7 10 HDD SP MENU 12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP 12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 12/02 SAT 10:00PM 7ch SP 12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 12/03 SUN 11:00PM 4ch SP 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) View options panel Sel ected title Command menu panel Title thumbnail Title information Title list Av ailable recording time PREV NEXT DISPLAY HDD DVD Disc Navigator (DVD) 4 Titles 10Titles MENU Original 11/29 MON 7:00PM 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 1 9 10 12/03 SUN 8:00PM 12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 12/03 SUN 11:00PM 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) Style 4 Titles PlayList Original DISC NAVIGA TOR DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 68 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Editing 69 En 08 preserved if you use high-speed copy to make a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R/ RW. HDD genres The large capacity of the HDD mea ns that there may be many hour s of video in the recorder. To help yo u organize your HDD video content you can a ssign different genres to titles. Th ere are 10 genres in total, including 10 user-defin able ones that you can name as you like. Create Play L ist only Use this function to create a Play List and add titles to it. Before you can use this c ommand, make sure th at the Play List is switched on in the view options panel on the left. 1 Select ‘Cre ate’ from the command me nu panel. 2 Select an original title to add to the Play List. Repeat these two steps to add as many titles as neces sary to the Play List. Play Use this function to start playback of a titl e. 1 Highlight the title you want to play. 2 Select ‘Play’ from the comman d menu panel. Playback of the title you selected starts. Erase Use this f unction to erase unwa nted titles. When you erase titles fro m the HDD or Original titl es from a VR mode DVD-RW , the available recording space increases accordingly. Erasing a titl e from a DVD-RW (Video mode) or DVD RW disc increases the availab le recording tim e only if it is the last titl e on the disc. 1 Erasing Play List titles, or titles from a DVD-R (VR mode or Video mode ) o r D V D R , w i l l n o t result in any more free space on the disc. 1 Highlight the title you want to erase. 2 Select ‘Erase’ from the comman d menu panel. 3 Select ‘Y es’ to confirm o r ‘No’ to cancel. DVD ( VR) DVD-RAM ENTER Disc Navigator (DVD) 2h00m(1.0G) 1h00m(1.0G) 4 Titles Remain 0Titles 0h30m DVD VR Mode 2h00m(1.0G) Play List Play Erase Edit Undo Create No title ENTER DVD ( Video) DVD ( VR) DVD R DVD RW DVD-RAM HDD Note 1 There may be cases where erasing a title from a DVD R/ RW disc will result in incontiguous title numbers. ENTER Disc Navigator (HDD) 4 Titles Remain All Genres 10Titles 30h30m HDD SP Recent first 11/29 MON 7:00PM 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 1 9 8 7 10 12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP 12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 12/02 SA T 10:00PM 7ch SP 12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 12/03 SUN 11:00PM 4ch SP 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) Play Erase Edit Genre Name Multi-Mode DVD ( Video) DVD ( VR) DVD R DVD RW DVD-RAM HDD ENTER ENTER DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 69 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Editing 08 70 En Tip • You can erase a title quickly by pressing CLEAR when the title is highlighted. Confirm the edit by pressing ENTER . Title Name You can give titles new n ames of up to 64 characters long for VR mode, DVD-RAM and HDD recordings, and up to 40 character s for Video mode recordin gs and DVD R/ RW discs. 1 Highligh t the tit le you want to name (or rename). 2 Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Titl e Name’ from the command menu panel. 3 Input a name fo r the selected title. • A name generated automatically by the recorder will already be in the name input section of th e screen. Use the  REV SCAN / FWD SCAN buttons to change the cursor position. • Select CAPS or small to chang e to upper or lower-case, or use the CASE SELECTION buttons (  PREV /  NEXT ). • You can a lso use the CLEAR button to delete characte rs directly (press and hold for two seco nds to delete the whole name). For other remo te control key shortcuts, see Using the remote key shortcuts to input a name on page 71. • For discs formatted on a different DVD recorder, you will see only a limited charac ter set. 4 Select ‘OK’ to enter the name and return to the main Disc Navigator screen. • To return to the main Disc Navigator screen without saving changes to the title name, press RETURN . DVD ( Video) DVD ( VR) DVD R DVD RW DVD-RAM HDD ENTER Disc Navigator (HDD) 4 Titles Remain All Genres 10Titles 30h30m HDD SP Recent first 11/29 MON 7:00PM 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 1 9 8 7 10 12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP 12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 12/02 SA T 10:00PM 7ch SP 12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 12/03 SUN 11:00PM 4ch SP 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) Play Erase Edit Multi-Mode Genre Name Cancel Title Name Erase Section Cancel Set Thumbnail Set Genre Lock Divide Chapter Edit ENTER Input Title Name CAPS s mall OK Clear Spa ce A B C D E F G H I J K L M . , ? ! N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z ( ) : ; A A A A A A Æ ç E E E E I I I I # 2 3 ´ ¶ · 1 ¿ ` D N O O O O O ø U U U U Y ß $ % 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 < = > _ & £ \ § ¨ © ¬ – ® _ ° – / @ [ ¥ ] ˆ x { | } ~ ¡ c a – o – << << 1 / 4 1 / 2 3 / 4 ¸ 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4 ch SP ENTER DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 70 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Editing 71 En 08 Using the remote key shortcuts to input a name The table below shows the remote control key shortcuts that you can use to input characters in the name input screen. Pressing a button re peatedly cycles through the characters shown. If you want to enter two characters in succession that are both on the s ame button (for example a P and an R ), press  FWD SCAN to advance the cursor one space manually between inputting the two characters. *1 lower-case: ÿ; upper-case: ß Using a USB keyboard to en ter a name Using a USB keyboard connected to this recorder makes entering names ver y quick and convenient. 1 When in USB key board input mode, a USB icon ( ) appears in the lower-left of the screen. 2 Other than the standa rd alpha-numeric keys, use the followin g keys when entering nam es: Key Characters Key Characters 1 . , ’ ? ! – & 1 6 m n o 6 ö ô ò ó ø ñ 2 a b c 2 ä à á â ã æ ç 7 p q r s 7 $ ÿ/ß *1 3 d e f 3 è é ë ê 8 t u v 8 ü ù û ú 4 g h i 4 î ï ì í ¡ 9 w x y z 9 5 j k l 5 £ 0 0  [cursor back]  [cursor forward] /  [change case] CLEA R [clear character]  <space>  [finish name input] ~ ( ) _ / : ; ” ` ^ @ # ∗ % ¥ | = { } [ ] < > Note 1 • It’s possible that some USB keyboards will not work ex actly as expected when conne cted to this recorder. See also Connecting a USB de vice on page 23 for more connection information. • Certain keyboards may not be able to correctly input all characters. 2 If you use the remo te control to enter a name when in the USB keyboard input mode, the recorder will automatically switch to remote control input mode. Pr ess any key on the USB keyboard to return to USB keyboard input mode. Key Function Change the cursor position Select CAPS Select small Delete character at the current cursor position Delete the character at the previous cursor position Enter the name Exit the input screen  F1 F2 delete back space enter esc DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 71 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Editing 08 72 En Set Thumbnail You can chan ge the thumbnail picture tha t appears in the Disc Navigator for a title to any fram e that appears in that title. 1 Highligh t the tit le you want to change the thum bnail picture for. 2 Select ‘E dit’ > ‘Set Thu mbnail’ from the command menu panel. The thumbnail setting screen appears from which you ca n find the frame you want. 3 Use the playback controls (  ,  ,  ,  , etc.) to find a suitable frame, then press ENTER to set. You can al so use the chapt er and time search features (press PLAY MODE ), and the CM SKIP and CM BACK buttons. 4 Select ‘Exit’ to return to the Edit screen. Erase Section Using thi s command you can delete a part of a title, ideal for cutting out the com mercial breaks in a recording made f rom the TV. 1 Highli ght the title conta ining the section you want to erase. 2 Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Erase Section’ from the command menu pane l. 3 HDD only: Select the type of edit. • For more in formation abo ut these options, se e Editing accuracy on page 68. 4 Highlight ‘From’ then use the playback controls (  ,  ,  ,  , etc.) to find the start of the se ction to er ase, then press ENTER. The bar at the bottom of th e screen indicates the current play position in the titl e. After pressing ENTER , a marker shows the start of the section. HDD DVD ( Video) DVD ( VR) DVD R DVD RW DVD-RAM ENTER Disc Navigator (HDD) 4 Titles Remain All Genres 10Titles 30h30m Recent first HDD SP 11/29 MON 7:00PM 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 1 9 8 7 10 12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP 12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 12/02 SA T 10:00PM 7ch SP 12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 12/03 SUN 11:00PM 4ch SP 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) Play Erase Edit Multi-Mode Genre Name Cancel Title Name Erase Section Divide Cancel Set Thumbnail Set Genre Lock Chapter Edit Set Thumbnail (HDD)  Play Pause Rec. time 2h00m 10-1 12/03 Sun 11:00 PM 4ch SP 00.00.09.15 Exit OK Exit OK HDD DVD ( VR) DVD-RAM ENTER ENTER Video Mode Compatible Editing Frame Accurate Editing HDD/DVD RECORDER Please select the type of editing. Video Mode Compatible Editing is recommended for compatibility with high-speed copying. Erase Section (HDD)  Play Pause Rec. time 2h00m 10-1 12/03 Sun 11:00 PM 4ch SP Exit From To 00.00.09.15 DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 72 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Editing 73 En 08 5 Highl ight ‘To’ th en, in the same way, find the en d of the section to erase, then press ENTER. After pressing ENTER , another marker indicates the end of th e section, with the section it self marked in red. 6 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel. In the thumbnail viewer you can see a few seconds of video either side of the mar ked section to see how the edit will look. • When editin g VR mode Original cont ent, you may not be a ble to erase very short sections (less t h an five second s). Divide Play List only Use this c ommand t o divide a title into tw o. Note that once divided, the two new HDD titles cannot be recombined into one again. 1 Highligh t the tit le you want to divide. 2 Selec t ‘Edit’ > ‘D ivide’ from the command m enu panel. 3 HDD only: Select the type of edit. • For more informatio n about these options, see Editing accurac y on page 68. 4 Use the playback controls (  ,  ,  ,  , etc.) to find the place you want to divide the title. 5 Press to d ivide the title at th e current playba ck position. 6 Select ‘Y es’ to confirm o r ‘No’ to cancel. Chapter Edit When editing a VR mode DVD or video on the HDD you can edit individu al chapters within a title, with comman ds for eras ing, combining and dividing. 1 Highlight th e title that contains the chapters you want to edit. 2 Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Chapter Edit’ from the command menu pane l. ENTER ENTER HDD DVD ( VR) DVD-RAM ENTER Video Mode Compatible Editing Frame Accurate Editing HDD/DVD RECORDER Please select the type of editing. Video Mode Compatible Editing is recommended for compatibility with high-speed copying. Divide Title (HDD)  Play Pause Rec. time 2h00m 10–1 12/03 Sun 11:00 PM 4ch SP Cancel 00.00.09.15 Divide ENTER ENTER Ye s Divided titles cannot be combined. OK? No ! DVD ( VR) DVD-RAM HDD ENTER DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 73 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Editing 08 74 En 3 HDD only: Select the type of edit. • For more informatio n about these options, see Editing accurac y on page 68. 4 Select the comma nd you want: • Divide – Divide a chapter into two or more parts: Use the playba ck controls (  ,  ,  ,  , etc.) to find th e point at which you want to divide the cha pter, then press ENTER . You can keep dividing the cha pter as many times as you wish (up to 999 chapters per DVD-R/-RW/-RAM disc or 99 chapters per HDD title). • Erase 1 /Move 2 – Erase or move chapters: Select the chapter you want to erase/move and press ENTER . Select whether you wan t to erase or move the chapter. Move command onl y: Select the destination for the chapter, and press ENTER . • Combine 3 – Combine two adjacent chapters into one: Highlight the bar divider between two adjacent chapt ers and pres s ENTER . 5 Select ‘Exit’ to get back to the main Disc Navigator sc reen. Set Genre Use this command to assign a genre to a title. 1 Highlight the title you want to assign a genre to. Note 1 When editing VR mode Original conten t, it may not be possible to erase chapters less than five seconds long. 2 VR mode Play Li st only. ENTER Video Mode Compatible Editing Frame Accurate Editing HDD/DVD RECORDER Please select the type of editing. Video Mode Compatible Editing is recommended for compatibility with high-speed copying. Chapter Edit (DVD VR mode Play List) Rec. time 1–1  Play 0.00.00 12/03 Sun 11:00 PM 4ch SP 1h00m Chapters 5 Exit Erase/Move Combine Divide 3 It may not always be possible to combine two chapters, even though they are adjacent. If a chapter has been divided into three, then the middle chapter erased, it is not possible to combine the two remaining chapters into one. Chapter Edit (DVD VR mode Play List) 002 003 005 004 001 Rec. time Chapter 1h00m 0h01m 12/03 Sun 11:00 PM 4ch SP Exit Erase/Move Combine Divide Move Cancel Erase Chapter Edit (DVD VR mode Play List) 2 3 5 4 1 Rec. time 12/03 Sun 11:00 PM 4ch SP 1h00m Exit Erase/Move Divide Combine ENTER HDD DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 74 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Editing 75 En 08 2 Select ‘Edit’ > ‘ Set Genre’ from the command m enu panel. 3 Select a genre for the title. Lock Original o nly You can lock a title so that it can’t be edited or erased accidently. If you do ne ed to edit it, you can always unlock it later. Important • You can’t undo any edits made before changin g the lock stat us. You also can’t undo a lock/unlock command using the Undo option from the Disc N a vigator menu. 1 Highlight the title you want to lo ck (or unlock). 2 Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Lo ck’ from the comman d menu panel. An unlocked title will become locked; a locked title will be unlocked. Locked titles are shown in the Disc Navigator with a padlock icon. Move Play List only Use this f unction to re-a rrange the playi ng order of Play List titles. 1 Highlight the title you want to move. 2 Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Move’ from the comman d menu panel. ENTER Disc Navigator (HDD) 11/29 MON 7:00PM 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 1 4 Titles Remain All Genres 10Titles 30h30m Recent first HDD SP 9 8 7 10 12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP 12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 12/02 SA T 10:00PM 7ch SP 12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 12/03 SUN 11:00PM 4ch SP 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) Play Erase Edit Multi-Mode Genre Name Cancel Title Name Erase Section Divide Cancel Set Thumbnail Set Genre Lock Chapter Edit ENTER Disc Navigator (HDD) 11/29 MON 7:00PM 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 1 4 Titles Remain All Genres 10Titles 30h30m Recent first HDD SP 9 8 7 10 12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP 12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 12/02 SA T 10:00PM 7ch SP 12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 12/03 SUN 11:00PM 4ch SP 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) Play Erase Edit Multi-Mode Genre Name Cancel Title name Erase Section Edit Chapter Cancel Set Thumbnail Set Genre Lock Divide Free4 Free1 Free5 Free6 Free3 No Category Free2 HDD DVD ( Video) DVD ( VR) DVD R DVD RW DVD-RAM ENTER Disc Navigator (HDD) 11/29 MON 7:00PM 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 1 4 Titles Remain All Genres 10Titles 30h30m Recent first HDD SP 9 8 7 10 12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP 12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 12/02 SA T 10:00PM 7ch SP 12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 12/03 SUN 11:00PM 4ch SP 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) Play Erase Edit Multi-Mode Genre Name Cancel Title Name Erase Section Divide Cancel Set Thumbnail Set Genre Lock Chapter Edit DVD ( VR) DVD-RAM ENTER Disc Navigator (DVD) 4 Titles Remain 10Titles 0h30m 11/29 MON 7:00PM 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 2h00m(1.0G) 1h00m(1.0G) 1 2 3 4 DVD VR Mode Play List 2h00m(1.0G) 1 12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP 12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 12/02 SA T 10:00PM 7ch SP 12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 12/03 SUN 11:00PM 4ch SP 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) Play Erase Edit Multi-Mode Genre Name Cancel Title Name Erase Section Divide Cancel Set Thumbnail Move Combine Chapter Edit DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 75 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Editing 08 76 En 3 Select a new position for the title. After pressing ENTER , the new, updated Play List is displayed. Combine Play L ist only Use this function to combine two Play List titles into one. 1 Highligh t the tit le you want to combine. This title will remain in the same place after combinin g with anot her title. 2 Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Combine’ from the command m enu panel. 3 Select another title to combine with the first. This title wil l be appended to the first title selected. The screen below shows title 3 selected to be appended to title 1. 4 Select ‘Y es’ to confirm o r ‘No’ to cancel. Genre Name Use this command to rename one of the five user-definable genres ( Free 1 to Free 10 ). 1 Select ‘Genre Name’ from the comman d menu panel. ENTER Disc Navigator (DVD) 4 Titles Remain 10Titles 0h30m Play List 11/29 MON 7:00PM 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 1 2 1 3 4 MENU DVD VR Mode 12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP 12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 12/02 SA T 10:00PM 7ch SP 12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 12/03 SUN 11:00PM 4ch SP 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) Insert position Title to mov e DVD ( VR) DVD-RAM ENTER Disc Navigator (DVD) 4 Titles Remain 10Titles 0h30m DVD VR Mode Play List 11/29 MON 7:00PM 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 1 2 1 3 4 12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP 12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 12/02 SA T 10:00PM 7ch SP 12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 12/03 SUN 11:00PM 4ch SP 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) Play Erase Edit Multi-Mode Genre Name Cancel Title Name Erase Section Divide Cancel Set Thumbnail Move Combine Chapter Edit ENTER Disc Navigator (DVD) 4 Titles Remain 10Titles 0h30m DVD VR Mode MENU Play List 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP 1 2 1 3 4 12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP 12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 12/02 SA T 10:00PM 7ch SP 12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 12/03 SUN 11:00PM 4ch SP 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) ENTER Ye s OK to combine titles 1 and 3 ? No ! HDD ENTER Disc Navigator (HDD) 4 Titles Remain All Genres 10Titles 30h30m HDD SP Recent first 11/29 MON 7:00PM 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 1 9 8 7 10 12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP 12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 12/02 SA T 10:00PM 7ch SP 12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 12/03 SUN 11:00PM 4ch SP 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) Play Erase Edit Genre Name Multi-Mode DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 76 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Editing 77 En 08 2 Select one of the user- definable gen re names. 3 Input a name for the genre. • The name ca n be up to 12 characters long. • For informatio n on remote control key short cuts, see Using the remo te key shortcuts to input a name on page 71. 4 Select ‘OK’ to enter the name and exit. Multi-Mode Multi-Mode allows yo u to select several titles, then select a command that will be applied to all of the m. In this way you can select multiple titles and then erase them all at once, for exa mple. 1 Select ‘Multi-Mo de’ from the comman d menu panel. 2 Select titles from the title li st. Selected ti tles are marked with a  . 3 Select the command that you want app lied to all the marked titles. For example, select Erase to erase all the marked titles. Once the com mand is co mpleted, Mult i- Mode is a utomatically exited. ENTER Disc Navigator (HDD) 4 Titles Remain All Genres 10Titles 30h30m HDD SP Recent first 11/29 MON 7:00PM 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 1 9 8 7 10 12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP 12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 12/02 SA T 10:00PM 7ch SP 12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 12/03 SUN 11:00PM 4ch SP 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) Play Erase Edit Multi-Mode Genre Name Cancel Free1 Free2 Free3 Free4 Free5 Free6 Free7 ENTER Input Genre Name CAPS small OK Clear Space Free 1 A B C D E F G H I J K L M . , ? ! N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z ( ) : ; A A A A A A Æ ç E E E E I I I I # 2 3 ´ µ ¶ · 1 ¿ ` D N O O O O O ø U U U U Y ß $ % 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 < = > _ & £ \ § ¨ © ¬ – ® _ ˚ – / @ [ ¥ ] ˆ ÷ x ± { | } ~ ¡ c a – o – << << 1 / 4 1 / 2 3 / 4 ¸ ENTER HDD ENTER Disc Navigator (HDD) 4 Titles Remain All Genres 10Titles 30h30m Recent first HDD SP 11/29 MON 7:00PM 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 1 9 8 7 10 12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP 12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 12/02 SA T 10:00PM 7ch SP 12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 12/03 SUN 11:00PM 4ch SP 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) Play Erase Edit Genre Name Multi-Mode ENTER ENTER Disc Navigator (HDD) 4 Titles Remain All Genres 10Titles 30h30m Recent first HDD SP 1 9 8 7 10 12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP 12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 12/02 SA T 10:00PM 7ch SP 12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 12/03 SUN 11:00PM 4ch SP 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) Multi-Mode Change Genre Lock Unlock Single-Mode Erase DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 77 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Editing 08 78 En Undo If you make a mistake while editin g, you can generally undo it. There is one level of undo (in other words, you can onl y undo the last edit you made). • Select ‘Undo’ from the command me nu panel. • You can’t undo anything after exiting the Disc Navigator screen. Freque ntly asked que stions • Why doesn’t the available recording ti me increase when I erase titles from a VR mode DVD-R? When you erase titles from a DVD-R (or DVD R), the titles are no longer displayed, but the content remains o n the disc. DVD-R/ R are write-once media; they can ’t be erased or rewritten. •I c a n ’ t e d i t m y d i s c ! You may find th at as the available recording time is reduced on a VR mode DVD-R di sc, editing is no longer possibl e. This is becau se information about your edits requires a certain amount of di sc space. As you edit, this information builds up, eventually preventing you from editin g further. DVD ( Video) DVD ( VR) DVD R DVD RW ENTER Disc Navigator (DVD) 11/29 MON 7:00PM 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 2h00m(1.0G) 1h00m(1.0G) 1 4 Titles Remain 0Titles 0h30m DVD VR Mode 2h00m(1.0G) Play List Play Erase Edit Create Undo No title DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 78 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Copying and backup 79 En 09 Chapter 9 Copying and backup Introduction Use the copying features of this recorder to: • Back up important r ecordings stored on the HDD to a DVD. • Make a DV D copy of a recording o n the HDD to play in another player. • Transfer video from a DVD to the HDD for editing. • Transfer edited video from the HDD to DVD. The simplest way to copy a title is to use the One Touch Copy feature. This copies the currently playing HDD title to DVD, or DVD title to the HDD. See One Touch Copy below for detail ed instruct ions. For more sophisticated copying tasks you can build a Copy List of titles to copy, and edit titles so that you only co py the bits you want. See Using Copy Lists on page 81 for detailed instruction s. Where possible, the recorder will co py your recordings at high-sp eed. Depending on the recording mode, the kind of di sc loaded and various ot her factors, copying can be as fast as one minute per hour of video. See Minimum copyin g times o n page 121 for more on copying times. If you want to save disc space you can copy video at a lowe r recording quality (for example, an XP recording on the HD D copied to SP on a DVD). Copying in this way is always done in real-t ime. When real-time copying from th e HDD to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R/ RW, the chapter markers in the or iginal material are not copied. Chapter markers are put into the copy at inter vals, according to the Au to Chapte r settings (see also Auto Chapter (Video) and Auto Chapter (DVD R/ RW) on page 114). Restrictions on copying Commercial DVD-Video discs are protected using Copy Guard. These discs cannot be copied to the HDD. Some video material is copy-once protected. This means that it can be rec orded to HDD, but it can’t then be freely copied a gain. If you want to tra nsfer copy-once protected material from HDD to DVD, you’ll need to a CPRM ver. 1.1 or high er VR mode DVD-RW, ver. 2.0 or 2.1 VR mode DVD-R, or CPRM- compatible D VD-RAM disc (see CPRM on page 35 for more on this). Only one instance of a copy-once protected title can be ad ded to the Copy List, and after it’s been copied, the title is erased from th e HDD (it is therefore not possible to copy a locked title that is copy-once protected). You can identify copy-on ce protected material during playback by displaying di sc information on -screen. If the current title is copy-once protected, an exclamatio n mark ( ! ) is shown. Copyright Recording equipment shou ld be used only for lawful copying and you are advised to check carefu lly what is lawful copying in the country in wh ich you are making a cop y. Copying of co pyright material such as films or music is unlawful un less permitted by a legal exception or consented to by the rightowners. One Touch Copy * See also Copyright above. The One Touch Copy feature copies th e currently playing or selec ted (in the Disc Navigator) HDD title to DVD, or DVD title to HDD. The whole title is copied, rega rdless of where in the title yo u start the copy. DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 79 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Copying and backup 09 80 En HDD to DV D copies ar e made in t he same recording mode. When copying DVD to HDD, the copy is made in whatever recording mode is currently se t. Make sure that a reco rdable DVD disc is loaded when trying to copy from the HDD. 1 If you’ re copying f rom DVD to the HDD, select a recording mode. Note that selecting a recording mode higher than the title play ing will not result in a better quality record ing. 2 Press during pl ayback to copy the current title. The front pan el display in dicates that the title is being copied. • High-speed copying is used when copying from the HDD to DVD . Playback continues while copying. • Real-time co pying is used whe n copying from DVD to the HDD. Playback restarts from the beginning of the title. Cancelling One Touch Copy You can canc el a One Touch C opy once it’s started. • Press and hold for more than a second. Copying is canc elled and the video already copied is erased. • If you cancel a HDD to DVD-R/ R copy, the space available for recording does not return to the pre-copy figure. Notes on copying usi ng One Touch Copy Copying to DVD • Title nam e, chapter markers, as well a s thumbnail picture markers for the D isc Navigator, are also copied. However, if you copy to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R/ RW, only the first 40 characters of a name are copied. • The chapter markers in the copy may no t be in exactly the same positions a s the original when recording on to a DVD-R/ -RW (Video mode) or DVD R/ RW. • You can’t use the One Tou ch Copy function to copy a titl e if any part of t he title is copy-once protected. • A title that co ntains mixed aspect ratios can’t be copi ed to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R/ RW. Use a DVD-R/ -RW (VR mode) or DVD-RAM disc for this type of material. • Low resolu tion ( SEP through LP modes 1 ) widescreen material can’t be c opied to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R/ RW. Use a DVD-R/-RW (VR mode) or DVD-RAM disc for this type of material. • When HDD Recordin g Format is set to Video Mode Off, titles record ed in LP / MN9 to MN15 modes cannot be high- speed copied to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R/ RW. Please use a DVD-R/-RW (VR mode) or DVD-RAM. • Recordings of dual m ono/bil ingual broadcasts cannot be high-speed copied to a DVD -R/-RW (Video mo de) or DVD R/ RW . Please us e a DVD-R/- RW (VR mode) or DVD-RAM. • XP titles canno t be copied to D VD via One Touch Copy. • Titles over eight hour s cannot be copied to single-layer DVD R/ RW discs using One Touch Copy. Use DVD R DL discs for titles over eight hours. • Titles record ed in MN1 to MN6 , SEP , SLP or EP m o d e c a n n o t b e c o p i e d t o D V D R / RW using One Touch Cop y. Copying to the HDD • The maxi mum title le ngth for co pying is 12 hours. • Title name and chapter markers are also copied, except when copying from a finalized Video mode DVD-R/-RW. REC MODE ONE TOUCH COPY ONE TOUCH COPY Note 1 In manual recording mode these equate to MN1 to MN15 (Video Mode Off) or MN1 to MN8 (Video Mode On). DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 80 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Copying and backup 81 En 09 • Thumbnail picture markers and chapter markers for the Disc Navigato r are copied, but their posi tion in the copy may be slight ly changed fro m the original. • If some part o f the title being copied is copy-p rotected, cop ying will st art, but the copy-protected portions will not be copied. Using Copy Lists * See also Copyright on page 79. At its simplest, a Copy List is j ust a list of HDD or DVD titles tha t you want to copy. When copying HDD titles to DVD, you can, however, edit th e titles in your copy list, erasing chapters you don’t nee d, or re- naming titles, for example. Edits you make to titles in the Copy List do not af fect the actual video content; only the ‘virtual’ c o ntent of the Copy List. So you can freely erase and modify anything in your Cop y List safe in the knowledge that the actual content is not being altered. Copying from HDD to DVD Important • Unless otherwise stat e d, the OSDs shown in t his manual are fo r the Taiwan and Phili ppines model. • The recorder can only store one Copy List at a ti me. • The Copy List is e rased if the Input Line System setting is changed (see Additional information about the TV system settings on page 119). • Resetting the recorder to its factory settings (see Resetting the recorder on page 136) will erase the Copy List. 1 Load a recordable DVD. • It is possible to co mplete the following steps without having a recordable DVD loaded (or having an uninitialized DVD loaded); however, the steps are slightly different . • If you want to use a DVD-RW (VR mode) disc for the copy, mak e sure it is initiali zed before you st art. 2 Select ‘Copy’ from the Home Menu. 3 Select ‘HDD  DVD’. • If this i s the first tim e to create a Copy List, skip to step 5 below. 4 If there is already a Copy List stored in the recorder, choose whether to ‘Create New Copy List’ or ‘Con tinue Using Previous Copy Li st’. •I f y o u s e l e c t Continue Usi ng Previous Copy List , skip to step 10 below. • Selecting Create New Co py List will erase any Copy List already stored in th e recorder. 5 Add titles to the Copy List (highlig ht a title an d press EN TER to add). Titles you’ve added to the Copy List are highligh ted in p ink. HOME MENU ENTER HDD DVD Disc Back-up DVD/CD HDD Continue Using Previous Copy List Create New Copy List ENTER Copy Select Title Recent first All Genres 8 Title Copy List T otal Current DVD Remain 0.0G 4.3G 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Back Next SP 11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 7:00PM 2h00m(1.0G) 2ch Free1 HDD DVD (Video mode) 1 > 2 > 3 DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 81 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Copying and backup 09 82 En There are some restrictions on titles that can be added to the Copy Li st if you are copying to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R/ RW: • When adding titles that con tain copy- once prot ected material , the copy-once parts will not be added. • When adding titles that contain material of more than one asp ect ratio (screen size), each part with a different aspect ratio will be added as a separate title if high-speed copying i s possible. Depending on the title 1 , high-speed copying may not be possible to DVDs. 6 Press  to display the command menu p anel. 7 Select ‘Next’ to move on to the Title Edit screen. 8 To edit a title, highl ight it using the / buttons, then press ENTER. A menu of editing comma nds appears: • Erase – Erase individual titles from the Copy List (see Er ase on page 69 ). • Title Name – Name or rename a title in the Copy List (see Title Name on page 70). • Erase Section – Erase part of a title (see Erase Section on page 72). • Move – Change the order of titles in the Copy List (see Move on page 75). • Preview – Check the content of a title in the Copy List. • Divide – Divid e a title in the Copy Li st into two (see Divide on page 73). • Combine – Combine two ti tles in the Copy List into one (see Combin e on page 76). • Chapter Edit – Edit c hapters within a Copy List title (see Chapter Edit on page 73): • Divide – Divide a chapter into two. • Erase/Mov e – Erase a chapter/ Change the ch apter order. • Combine – Combine two chapters into one. Note 1 T he following titles cannot be co pied at high-sp eed for DVD R/ RW: • Titles recorded in MN1 to MN6 , SEP , SLP or EP mode. The following titles cannot be copied at high-s peed for DV D-R/-RW (V ideo Mode) and DV D R/ RW: • Widescreen titles record ed at low resolution ( SEP through LP / MN1 to MN15 ( V i d e o M o d e O f f ) o r MN1 to MN8 (Video Mode On)). • LP / MN9 to MN15 recordings when HDD Recording Fo rmat is set to Video Mode Off. • Dual mo no/Bilingual recordings. • Combined titles that were originally recorded usi ng different recording mode s. The following titles cannot be copied at high- speed for an y types of DV D: • XP titles. Copy Select Title Recent first All Genres 8 Title Copy List T otal Current DVD Remain 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 SP 11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 7:00PM 2h00m(1.0G) 2ch Free1 HDD DVD (Video mode) 4.3G 4.3G 1 > 2 > 3 Back Next The command menu panel Copy Title Edit 2 Title Copy List T otal Current DVD Remain 1 2 4.3G 4.3G 1 > 2 > 3 Back Next 1h00m(2.0G) HDD DVD (Video mode) 1 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP Copy Title Edit 2 Title Copy List T otal Current DVD Remain 1 2 4.3G 4.3G 1 > 2 > 3 Back Next 1h00m(2.0G) HDD DVD (Video mode) 1 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP Erase Title Name Erase Section Move Preview Cancel DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 82 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Copying and backup 83 En 09 • Set Thumbnail – Set the thum bnail frame for a title (see Set Thumbnail on page 72). • Recording Mode – Set the picture quality of the copy (see Re cording Mode on page 84). • Dual Mono Audio/Biling ual – Set how dual mono/bilingua l audio should be copied when copying from HDD to DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) and DVD R/ RW (see Dual Mono Audio/Bilingual on page 85). • Cancel – Exit the menu. Repeat th is step for as many titles you have that need editing. 9 Display the comman d menu panel. 10 Select ‘Next’ to proceed. There are several optio ns available from the next screen: • Select Recording Mo de if you want to change the recording quality (see Recording Mo de on page 84). • Select Input Disc Name if y ou want to change the disc name. Inp ut a name of u p t o 6 4 c h a r a c t e r s f o r a V R m o d e d i s c o r 40 characters fo r a Video mode disc or DVD R/ RW. (The inpu t method is similar to that of naming titles; see Title Name on page 70.) • Select Finalize if you want to automati cally finalize a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R after copying. 1 Select a title menu style from the followin g screen. 11 Select ‘Start Copy’ to start copying. • If you’r e using a DVD-R DL or DVD R DL disc and the copy will span both layers, the Copy List T otal bar will be purple. •T h e Current DVD Re main bar will be half-length if the fir st layer of a DVD-R DL or DVD R DL disc is already full. Copying from DVD to HDD Important • The DVD to HDD Co py screen isn’t accessible when a finalized Vi deo mode DVD-R/-RW or a DVD-Video is loaded. As long as the disc is not Copy Guard protected, you can still use the One Touch Copy function, however (see One Touch Copy on page 79). • The recorder can o nly store one Copy List at a time. • The Copy List will be erased if : – any of the titles on the DVD disc are erased or edited. – the disc tray is opened. – playback is switched between Play List and Original. – the DVD disc is re-initi alized or finalized. – the recorder is reset to its factory settings (see Resetting the recorder on page 136). ENTER Copy Title Edit 2 Title Copy List T otal Current DVD Remain 1 2 4.3G 4.3G 1 > 2 > 3 Back Next 1h00m(2.0G) HDD DVD (Video mode) 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP Note 1 If a t i mer recording is scheduled to start du ring copying, the disc will not be finalized. ENTER Copy HDD DVD (Video Mode) Start Copy Copy Time 0 h 1 6m Recording Mode Disc Name Finalize Back Recording Mode Input Disc Name Finalize Start Copy Copy List T otal Current DVD Remain 4.3G 4.3G DVD-RW Video Mode HDD High-Speed Off 1 > 2 > 3 DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 83 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Copying and backup 09 84 En • It may no t be possibl e to copy from a DVD disc that was recorded on a different DVD recorder or a PC. 1 Select ‘Copy’ from the Home Menu. 2 Select ‘DVD/CD  HDD’. 3 Select a Copy List type. • Selecting Create New Copy List will erase any Copy Li st al ready stored in the recor der. 4 Add titles to the Copy List (highlig ht a title an d press EN TER to add). Titles you’ve added to the Copy List a re highlighted i n pink. 5 Select ‘Next’ fro m the command menu panel to proceed to the title edit screen. 6 Select a title to edit. A menu appears of Copy List editing commands: • Erase – Erase individual titles from the Copy List (see Erase on page 69). • Move – Change th e order of titles in the Copy List (see Move on page 75). • Preview – Check the content of a title in the Copy List. • Cancel – Exit the menu. Repeat this ste p for as many titles you have that need editing. 7 Select ‘Next’ from the command menu panel to proceed to the copy options screen. • Select Recording Mo de if you want to change the recording qu ality (see Recording Mode below). 8 Select ‘Start Copy’ to start copying. Recording Mode 1 Select ‘Rec ording Mode’ fro m the command menu panel. 2 Select a recording mode for the copy. • High-Spe ed Copy 1 – The Copy List is copied at the same recording quality as the original. • XP , SP , LP , EP , SLP , SEP , MN 2 – The Copy List is copied at the specified recordi n g quality in real-time. (Note that if you copy at a higher quality setting than the original, the copy wi ll not be better quality than the origi nal.) If you select MN above, you can also change the level setti ng ( MN1 to MN32 3 , LPCM or XP 4 ) from the Recordin g Quality box that appears . HOME MENU ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER Note 1 When copying to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R/ R W, the chapter markers in the copy may not be in exactly the same position as the original. 2 When the copy mode is set to something other than Hi gh-Speed Copy for copying to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R/ RW, the chapter markers of the original are not copied. Chapter markers are put into the copy at regular intervals, according to th e Auto Chapter setting (see also Auto Chapter (Video) and Auto Ch apter (DVD R/ RW) on page 114). 3 When copying to a DVD R/ RW, MN1 to MN3 and SEP modes are not available. 4 XP mode available only when copying to HDD. ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 84 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Copying and backup 85 En 09 • Optimiz ed 1,2 – The recording quality is automatically adjusted so that the Copy List fits on to the spa ce available on the disc. C opying is carried out in real-t ime. When you chan ge the recording mode setting, you can see how much disc space it will require . If this is mo re than is availab le, it shows up in red and you won’t be able to start copying. In this case, either change the recording quality, or press RETURN to go back to the Copy List screen and erase one or more titles from the C opy List. Dual Mono Audio/Bilingual 1 Select the title con t aining the audio you want to chan ge. 2 Select ‘Dual Mono Audio/ Bilingua l’ from the command menu panel. 3 Select a dual mono audio/ bilingua l option. Using disc backup * See also Copyright on page 79. This feature off ers a simple way to make a backup copy of fina lized DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) discs or DVD R/ RW discs. The data is copied first to the hard disk drive 3 , then on to another rec ordable DVD disc. 1 Select ‘Copy’, then ‘Disc backup’ from the Home Menu. 2 Select a backup option. There are three backu p options: • Start new di sc back-up – Start making a backup of a disc. • Resume writing data – Record the backup data already on the HDD to a recordable DVD. • Erase back-up data – Erase the backup data on the HDD. 3 Load the disc you want to make a backup of . You can only m ake backup copies of finalized Video mode DVD-R/- RW discs, finalized DVD R or DVD RW discs (excluding DVD-R DL/DVD R DL discs). 4 Select ‘Start’. • To see the progress of the backup, press DISPLAY . Note 1 When the copy mode is set to something other than Hi gh-Speed Copy for copying to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R/ RW, the chapter markers of the original are not copied. Chapter markers are put into the copy at regular intervals, according to th e Auto Chapter setting (see also Auto Chapter (Video) and Auto Ch apter (DVD R/ RW) on page 114). 2 Optimized mode only available when co pying to DVD. Due to remaining space on the disc or the title that you copy, this mode does not always exactly fill a disc. 3 It is not possible to play this material directly from the HDD. ENTER ENTER HOME MENU ENTER Start new disc back-up Resume writing data Erase back-up data No disc. Please load a disc to be backed-up. Start Cancel Disc Back-up ENTER Read from disc and save to HDD. Start reading? Start Cancel Disc Back-up DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 85 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Copying and backup 09 86 En • You can ca ncel the backup process by pressing ONE TOUCH COPY for more than one second. 5 When the data ha s been copied, take out the disc and load a blank* recordable DVD. * If you’re using a DVD-RW or DVD RW , the disc doesn’t have to be blank, alt hough the previo us contents o f the disc wi ll be erased i n the backup process . You can use a DV D-R ver. 2.0, 2.1 or 2.2 disc, or DVD-RW ver. 1.1 or ver. 1.2 disc for the backup. • If you backup a DVD-R disc to DVD-RW, you cannot un do the finalization later. • Actual rec ordable capacity o f discs vary so there may be ca ses where the contents of the disc you’re backing-up will not fit on to a particular blank disc. If this happens, please try another brand of disc. • DVD-R/-RW discs can only be backed up to DVD-R/-RW discs; DVD R/ RW discs ca n only be ba cked up to DVD R/ RW discs. 6 Select ‘Start’ to start writing the backed-up data to the bl ank disc. • To see the progress of the backup, press DISPLAY . • You can ca ncel the backup process by pressing ONE TOUCH COPY for more than one second. However, this will make the disc unusable (although if you are using a DVD-RW or DVD RW disc you can re-initialize it in order to ma ke it usable again — see Initi alizing recordable DVD discs on page 49.) 7 After the recorder has finished recording the backup disc, you can select whether to make anot her backup of the same data or exit. • Select Start to make anoth er backup copy or Cancel to finish. If you want to make another backup copy, return to step 6 above. 8 If you don’t need to keep the backup data on the HDD, yo u can delete it now. Select Yes to delete the data from the HDD; select No to keep it (you can delete it later if you want to ). • If you decide to lea ve the backup data on the HDD, you can make ba ckup copies to record able DVD discs any time from the Disc Back-up menu. Disc content saved to Hard Disk Drive. Please eject the disc and load a recordable disc Start Cancel Disc Back-up Write back-up data from Hard Disk Drive. The disc contents will be overwritten. OK to start? Start Cancel Disc Back-up Disc back-up finished. T o make another back-up copy , please load a recordable disc. Start Cancel Disc Back-up The backed-up data is still on the HDD. Erasing it will increase the free space available. OK to Erase? Ye s No Disc Back-up DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 86 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Using the Jukebox 87 En 10 Chapter 10 Using the Jukebox The Jukebox feature allows yo u to use the recorder’s HDD to store an d playback music from your CDs. You ca n also transfer WMA/ MP3 files stored on CD-R/-RW/-ROM, DVD, USB device or PC. Copying music to the HDD The first step is to copy some music to the HDD. CD audio, W MA and MP3 files are copied at high speed. Usually, eac h track on a CD o r DVD is categorized and copied onto the HDD on the basis of informat ion on artists and albums. 1 Note that once copied to the HDD, audio tracks cannot be cop ied to a recordable DVD disc. Important • While copying, n o other recorder operation is possible. • When cop ying, scheduled timer recordings will no t start until copying is compl ete. • Copy protected CDs may n ot copy successfully. 1 Load the CD/DV D you want to copy to the HDD. 2 Select the DVD. 3 Open the Disc Navigato r. 4 Display the command menu. 5 Select ‘Edit’ from th e menu. 6 Select ‘Copy all to HDD’ from the menu. On pressing ENTER all tracks (or files) on the CD are copied to th e HDD. • When a folder o f WMA/MP3 files is selected, you can copy only the files contained in the folder by using Copy to HDD . • You can also c opy tracks (or files) by selecting Copy > DVD/C D  HDD and pressing ENTER from the Hom e Menu. • You can also start copying by starting playbac k of the CD/DVD and the n pressing ONE TOUCH COPY . • To cancel co pying press ENTER . • If t h e C D l o a d e d c o n t a i n s b o t h C D a u d i o tracks and WMA/MP3 files, the part currently selected will copy. Note 1 • Up to 50 000 tracks ca n be created in the Jukebox. (You can create up to 50 000 artists/albums in total.) • Sound quality is not worsened when you copy data from another source. • When playing back an al bum copied from a source wh ose original audio track plays continuously (such as a live recording), there will be a brie f pause in sound between tracks. • WMA/MP3 files are classified accordin g to the information included in the files. Track names may differ from the names of the original files. • Depending on the name of the origin al folder and track, the artist and album under which the folder or track is classified may differ. DVD DISC NAVIGA TOR HDD CD T rack 0 1 650MB 0.04.30 / 1.14.00 (None) T rack 0 3 0.05.30 T rack Repeat Stereo 3 10.00.00 100.0 G Remain Disc Navigator (DVD/CD) 2 T rack 02 3 T rack 03 4 T rack 04 5 T rack 05 6 T rack 06 7 T rack 07 8 T rack 08 1 T rack 01 T rack List MENU 10 T racks Play Edit Play Mode The command menu panel ENTER ENTER 10 Jukebox.fm 8 7 ページ ２０ ０７年８月２ ７日　月曜日　 午後４時４１ 分
Using the Jukebox 10 88 En Copying files via USB Connecting a regular USB device You can copy WMA or MP3 files from a connected USB device, such as a USB drive, to the HDD. 1 Connect the USB device. 2 Select ‘Juk ebox’ from the Home Menu. 3 Select ‘Listen to Music from USB device’. 4 Display the comman d menu. 5 Select ‘Edit’ from the menu. 6 Select ‘Copy all to HDD’ from the menu. The folders on the USB device will be copied to the HDD. • Up to 99 folders/999 files on the USB device can be copied/ displayed. • Only the files that have be en read can be copied. To copy the files that have not been read, reload th e files (see below). • To copy specific fold ers, select th e desired folders and select Copy to HDD . Reloading files from a USB device If you have a USB device with mo re than 1000 files and/or 100 folders, you can still view all the tracks usin g th e reload function. 1 Navigate to th e last entry in the folder list (‘Read next: ...’ ). 2 Load the next batch of up to 999 files/99 folders from the connected USB device. It takes several minutes to reloa d files. 1 Connect PC Using a USB connection, you can copy WMA and MP3 files from a PC to th e HDD of this device. Operations carried o ut on the PC require Windows Media Player 11. Important • If the PC you are using does not currently have Windows Media Pla yer 11 installed, you must first install the pro gram and make sure it functions c orrectly before connecting the USB cabl e and attempting to use the Co nnect PC function. • For more in formation on Connec t PC, see Using a PC on page 24. • You canno t edit or delete a lbums from this device when it is connected to a PC via USB. If you wish to edit or delete albums via the Jukebox, you must first disconnect the USB cable. 1 Connect the PC via US B cable. The screen below is displayed. Press ‘  ’ to close the screen. HOME MENU ENTER ENTER ENTER Note 1 Y ou can press HOME MENU to exit the Jukebox screen while the recorder is reloading files. ENTER DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 88 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Using the Jukebox 89 En 10 *Depending on the Windows OS version and the Windows Media Pla yer settings, the screen shown below ma y not be displayed. 2 Select ‘Juk ebox’ from the Home Menu. 3 Select ‘Connect PC’. 4 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel. 5 Verify that the import screen is displayed on the device. If no actions are carried out for 20 minutes, the import screen is autom atically closed. To reopen it, you will have to r epeat steps 2 through 4 . 6 Open Windows Media Player 11 on the PC. The device settings screen appears. Click ‘Cancel’ . *Depending on the settings for Windows Media Player 11, the screen shown below may not be displayed. From the PC, in Windows Media Pla yer 11: 1. Click ‘Sync’. 2. Choose the a rtist, album or song you would like to copy , and press the right mouse button. 3. Click ‘Add to Sync list’. 4. Click ‘S tart Sync’. This begins the synchron ization process. When finished, the message ‘Synchr onized to Device’ is displayed in Win dows Media Player 11. HOME MENU ENTER ENTER Connect PC 00000 Folders ( 000 error ) 000000 Files ( 000 error ) Standby Exit Number of copied folders Status Number of files unable to be copied Number of copied files ‘Cancel’ ‘Start Sync ’ DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 89 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Using the Jukebox 10 90 En For more information re fer to the Help menu of Windows Me dia Player 11. • To cancel the sync hronization process while it is un derway, press ENTER on the remote control. The Connect PC screen is closed. • If synchroniza tion fails, make sure that the Pioneer. HDD/DVD -Recorder device is selected at the synchr onization screen of Windows Media Pla yer 11, and try again. 7 When you h ave finished cop ying files, close Wi ndows Media Player 11 on the PC. 8 Close the import screen on this device. • If no actions a re carried out for 20 minutes after copying, the import screen is automatically clo sed. Note • When using the sync function of Windows Media Player 11 , music, artist and album folders are created as follows: • The above music fo lder is not displayed. • Up to 50 000 tracks can be included in one album. (The total number of tracks allowed in Juke box is 50 000.) Note that when there a re many tracks contained in one album, it may take time to display and transfer these tracks. • Artists, albums and tracks with no set name that are transferred from C D/DVD/ USB are displayed as ‘Unknown Artist’, ‘Unknown Album’ and ‘Unkn own File’ in Windows Media Player 11. • Artists, albums and tr ack names that do not conform to the I SO8859-1 standard may display differently in Windows Media Player 11 a nd the Jukebox. • File whose extensions are not supported by the Jukebox (i.e. files th at are not .mp3 or .wma) ca nnot be transferred. • Files imported to th is recorder via Connect PC cannot be exported fro m this recorder. • Note that no recording functions, including timer record ings, will be carried out when you ar e using the Connect PC fu nction. Playing music from the Jukebox You can select artists, albums or individual tracks from the Jukebox to play. 1 Select ‘Jukebox’ from the Home Menu. 2 Select a Jukebox option. • List en to M usic/E dit – Listen to CDs or WMA/MP3 files that h ave been copied to the HDD. • List en to M usic f rom US B devi ce – Listen to music from an external USB device. Proceed to step 4 . Connect PC 00001 Folders ( 000 error ) 000003 Files ( 000 error ) Copying Exit Progress Bar ENTER Root Artist 1 Music Album 1 Album 2 Artist 2 Album 1 music1.mp3 music1.mp3 music2.mp3 music1.wma HOME MENU ENTER DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 90 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Using the Jukebox 91 En 10 3 Select the artist you want to play back. The screen below shows artists stored on the HDD: The album display changes for the selected artist when you press ENTER . • This step is for the display mode set to Artist . The ope ration varies when the display mode is set to other settings. • To play back all artists, select All and proceed to step 6 . • Press SUBTITLE or ANGLE to change the page. 4 Select the al bum you want to play back. Press ENTER to change the track display for the selected album. • To play ba ck all albums, selec t All and proceed to step 6 . 5 Select the track you want to play back. • To play back al l tracks, select All . 6 Display the command menu. 7 Select ‘Play’ from the menu. Repeat play 1 Display the command menu during playback. 2 Select ‘Repeat’ from the menu. • Select Play Mo de when audio files stored on a USB device are being playe d back (see The Play Mode menu on page 58). 3 Select a repeat function from the command menu panel. • Repeat Artist – Repeats all track s of an artist being played back. • Repeat Album – Repeats all tracks of an album being played back. • Repeat Track – Repeats the track bei n g played back. • Repeat Off – Cancels repeat playbac k. ENTER HDD Artist Artist1 T otal 10 100.0 G Remain Jukebox HDD 2 Artist2 1 Artist1 3 Artist3 4 Artist4 5 Artist5 6 Artist6 7 Artist7 ALL Artist List 10 Artists Original MENU ENTER HDD T rack T rack1 MP3 8GB classical 100.0 G Remain Jukebox HDD 2 T rack2 1 T rack1 3 T rack3 4 T rack4 5 T rack5 6 T rack6 7 T rack7 ALL T rack List 10 Tracks Original MENU Play Erase Edit Repeat Add to Play List Play List Name ENTER ENTER ENTER DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 91 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Using the Jukebox 10 92 En Playing your favourite music (P lay List) You can collect and play back only your favourite songs stored on the HDD. Creating a play list 1 Select a track you want to add to a play list. 2 Display the comman d menu. 3 Select ‘Add to Play List’ from the menu. 4 Select a pla y list (‘Play List 1’ to ‘Play List 4’) wh ere you want to add the selected track. • You can add up to 25 so ngs to a play list. • You can renam e a play list (see Editing the HDD Jukebox on page 93). Playing a play list 1 Display the view o ptions panel. 2 Select ‘Play List’. 3 Select a play list (‘Play List 1’ to ‘Play L ist 4’) you want to p lay back. 4 Display the command menu. 5 Select ‘Play’ from the menu. Changing the display style of the Jukebox 1 Select an artist/album yo u want to change the display for. 2 Displ ay the view optio ns panel. 3 Select a view option. • Display Mo de By artist – Displays the artists copied onto this unit from the earliest date. By album – Displays the albums of the selected artist. When you select All , albums of a ll artist are disp layed. By track – Displa ys the track s of the selected artist/album. When you select All , tracks of the all artist/album are displayed. ENTER ENTER ENTER HDD Artist Artist1 T otal 10 100.0 G Remain Jukebox HDD 002 Artist2 001 Artist1 003 Artist3 004 Artist4 005 Artist5 006 Artist6 007 Artist7 ALL Artist List 10 Artists Original MENU Artist Play List Original Display Mode The view options panel ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER HDD Artist Artist1 T otal 10 100.0 G Remain Jukebox HDD 002 Artist2 001 Artist1 003 Artist3 004 Artist4 005 Artist5 006 Artist6 007 Artist7 ALL Artist List 10 Artists Original MENU Artist Play List Original Display Mode ENTER DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 92 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
Using the Jukebox 93 En 10 • Play List Origin al – Displays the settin gs of Disp lay Mode (By ar tist) . Play List 1 to Play List 4 – Displays the tracks ad ded to each play list. Favourites – Displays up to 25 tracks you listen to most frequently. Copying albums/tracks You can copy the albums stored on the HDD to other fold ers of a different art ist on the HDD. Also, you can copy th e tracks stored on the HDD to other albums on the HDD. • You cannot copy the albums/tracks stored on the HDD to a DVD o r a USB device. 1 Select ‘Juk ebox’ from the Home Menu. 2 Select ‘Listen to Music/Edit’. 3 Select an album/track you want to copy. 4 Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Copy Al bum’ or ‘Copy Track’ fro m the command menu. 5 Select an artist/album you want to copy the se lected album/track to. Select New Artist or New Album if you want to create a new artist/album. The name of an artist/album becomes A _ number/ A _ number_F _ number. 6 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel. Editing the HDD Jukebox A number of commands ar e available for editing a nd changing th e playback behavior of albums. 1 Select ‘Jukebox’ from the Home Menu. 2 Select ‘Listen to Music/Edit’. 3 Select what you want to edit. 4 Select an edit functi on from the command menu panel. • Erase – Deletes the selected artist/ album/trac k. 1 • Edit > Artist name – Enter a name of up to 64 charac ters for the artist. S ee Title Name on page 70 f or how to enter names. • Edit > Al bum name – Enter a name of up to 64 characters for the album. See Title Name on page 70 for how to enter names. • Edit > Track name – Enter a name of up to 64 characters for the track. See Title Name on page 70 f or how to enter names. • Play List name – Enter a name of up to 12 characters for th e Play List. See Title Name on page 70 f or how to enter names. HOME MENU ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER Note 1 Some time may be required to erase artist s or albu ms if they include many tracks. HOME MENU ENTER ENTER ENTER DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 93 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
The PhotoViewer 11 94 En Chapter 11 The PhotoViewer From the PhotoViewer you can view JP EG photos and picture fil es stored on the HDD, recordable DVD or C D-R/-RW/-ROM, or on a USB-equipped di gital camera. 1 You can also import files and save them to the recorder’s HDD or a DV D-R/-RW disc. Important • Unless otherwise stated, the OSD s shown in this manua l are for the Taiwan and Philippi nes model. Locating JPEG picture files 1 Select ‘PhotoVi ewer’ from the Home Menu. 2 Select the locati on of the files you want to view or edit. • View/Edit Photos on the HDD – View or edit photos already stored on the recorde r’s HDD. • View Photos on a CD/DVD – View photos on a Fujicolor CD, CD-ROM, CD-R/-RW, or DVD-R/-RW. • View Photos on a USB Device – View photos on a digital camera (or other USB device) connected to the USB port. • Copy Files from a Digital Camera – Copy al l DCF files directly from a connected digital camera to a record able DVD-R/ -RW. 3 Select the folder cont aining the files you want to view, copy or edit . The first image from the selected folder is displaye d as thumbn ail at the bo ttom of th e screen. From the Folder Information co lumn, you can chan ge thumbnails via the  REV SCAN /  FWD SCAN buttons. 4 Select the file you want to view, copy or edit. Note 1 Up to 999 files or 99 folders are viewable, but if there ar e m ore files/folders than this on the disc or connected USB camera it is still possible to view them all using the Reload function (see Reloadi n g file s from a disc or USB device on page 96). HOME MENU ENTER View/Edit Photos on the HDD View Photos on a USB Device Copy Files from a Digital Camera View Photos on a CD/DVD ENTER HDD Folder 002 Folder2 Files 999 Folder 999 MB 100.0 G Remain 1/3 PhotoViewer HDD 002 Folder2 003 Folder3 004 Folder4 005 Folder5 006 Folder6 007 Folder7 008 Folder8 001 Folder1 Select Folder FOLDER MENU Currently selected folder in folder list Folder informa tion Pages in folder list HDD File 001 PIOR0000 002 PIOR0001 003 PIOR0002 004 PIOR0003 005 PIOR0004 006 PIOR0005 007 PIOR0006 008 PIOR0007 009 PIOR0008 010 PIOR0009 011 PIOR0010 012 PIOR0011 100.0 G Remain 1/84 PhotoViewer HDD Folder2 Folder Size 999 MB 12 Files FILE MENU Currently selected thumbnail Pages in file list DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 94 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
The PhotoViewer 95 En 11 • The larger the file si ze, the longer it ta kes the recorder to load the file. • You can change folders via the  REV SCAN / FWD SCAN buttons. • If you encounter a disc tha t will not play, check that the disc and file forma ts are compatible with this recorder (see JPEG file compatibili ty and PC-created disc compatibility on page 11). • The thumb nail of files that ca nnot be played is displayed as th e logo. Changing the display style of the PhotoViewer You can choose to display photos by grouping them by folder, file, or number of thumbnails. 1 Display the view o ptions panel. 2 Choos e ‘Display Mo de’ or ‘Style’ then press ENTER to see the available vi ew options. • Displa y Mode – Choose between folder and file display modes. • Style – Choose between displays of 1, 4 and 12 thumbnails. 3 Choose a view op tion, then press ENTER. The display mode will cha nge to that wh ich you have chosen. Playing a slideshow 1 Select a fol der from the folder list. To start the slideshow from the first file in the folder, skip to step 3 after choosing the desired folder and pressing  . 2 Select a thumbnail. •U s e  PREV / NEXT to display the previou s/next page of th umbnails. 3 Select ‘Start Slidesh ow’ or ‘Start Audio Slides how’ from the menu. When Start Audio Slidesh ow is selected, you can enjoy the slideshow while playing back music in Jukebox. Press / to select the desired play list or Favourit es that contains the songs you want to play bac k and then press EN TER . For more information on addin g music to the HDD, see Using the Jukebox on pa ge 87. • You can also select a file or folder then press  PLAY to start playing the slideshow. •U s e  PREV / NEXT to display the previous/next picture, or  PAUSE to pause the slideshow. • Depending on th e aspect ratio, some pictures may be displayed with black bars top and bottom, or left and right. • Large picture files may ta ke a few seconds to display. This is normal. HDD File 001 PIOR0000 002 PIOR0001 003 PIOR0002 004 PIOR0003 005 PIOR0004 006 PIOR0005 007 PIOR0006 008 PIOR0007 009 PIOR0008 010 PIOR0009 011 PIOR0010 012 PIOR0011 100.0 G Remain 1/84 PhotoViewer HDD Folder2 Folder Size 999 MB 12 Files FILE MENU File Style 12 Files Display Mode The view options panel ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 95 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
The PhotoViewer 11 96 En 4 Press to return to the thumbnail. • You can also use the RETURN button. 5 Press to exit the PhotoViewer. Zooming an image During a slid eshow you can zoom in to enlarge a portion of the picture by a factor of two or four. You can a lso move the area of the picture displayed. 1 Press duri ng the slide show to zoom the picture. Repeated presses cycle between zoom off, 2x zoom and 4 x zoom. The zoom factor is displayed on-screen. 2 Use to move the zoomed area. Rotating an image You can rotate the displayed picture du ring a slideshow so you can always view pictures the right way up, whichever way they were taken. • Press during the slideshow to rotate the displayed pic t ure cloc kwise by 90º. Press repea tedly to continu e rotating the picture in increments of 90º. Reloading files from a disc or USB device If you have a disc with more tha n 1000 files and/or 100 folders, you ca n still view all the images using the reload function. 1 Navigate to th e last entry in the folder list (‘Read next: ...’ ). 2 Load the next batch of up to 999 files/99 folders from the disc or connected USB devic e. It will take a moment (at most a few minutes) to load in the images. 1 Importing files to the HDD You can import files and save them to the HDD 2 from a CD, DVD or a connected USB camera. Once on t h e HDD you can edit and organize your pictures and print them out if you’ve connected a PictBridge-compa tible printer. 1 Select the location of folders/ files you w ant to impor t. To import a whole fol der, select the desired folder, press  , an d skip to step 3 below . • To import mult iple folders, use the Multi- Mode; see Selecting multip le files or folders on page 97. 2 Select a file to import, then press  . • To import multiple fil es, use the Multi- Mode; see Selecting multip le files or folders on page 97. 3 Select ‘Copy to HDD’ from the menu. STOP HOME MENU ENTER ANGLE Note 1 Y ou can press HOME MENU to exit the PhotoViewer screen while the r ecorder is reloading images. (If you enter the PhotoViewer again, i t will resume reloading.) 2 For files you want to keep per manently, we recommend backing up to DVD-R/-RW. ENTER ENTER ENTER HDD File 001 PIOR0000 002 PIOR0001 003 PIOR0002 004 PIOR0003 005 PIOR0004 006 PIOR0005 007 PIOR0006 008 PIOR0007 009 PIOR0008 010 PIOR0009 011 PIOR0010 012 PIOR0011 100.0 G Remain 1/84 PhotoViewer CD/DVD Folder2 Folder Size 999 MB 12 Files FILE MENU Start Slideshow Copy all to HDD Copy to HDD Print Detailed Information Multi-Mode DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 96 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
The PhotoViewer 97 En 11 4 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm and copy the folder(s)/fi le(s), or ‘ No’ to cancel. • The files will be copied to the HDD with the same folder structure as the original. • Importing to the HDD will not work if there is in sufficient space on th e HDD, or if there are already the maximu m number of files and/or folders on the HDD (999 folders/999 files per folder). Selecting multiple files or folders The Multi-Mode al lows you to select multiple folders/f iles at once for importin g or editing. 1 Select the folder containi ng the files you want to import. 2 Display the comman d menu. 3 Select ‘Multi-Mode’ from the menu. 4 Select files/fo lders from the list. An orange check mark box (  ) is shown by the item you selected. A blue check mark box (  ) appears on the folder select screen when files from that folder are selected. 5 Display the command menu. 6 Select the comma nd you want to apply to all the sel ected items. Copying files to a DVD-R/-RW Using this feature you can c opy all the f iles 1 (including audio and movie fil es) stored on a connected USB camera to a recordable DVD disc. A slideshow of the files is also recorded on the disc as a Video mode title, making it possible to view the photos on other DVD players/recorders that may not be compatible w ith JPEG file playback. Once the files have been copied, the disc is automatical ly finalized. ENTER ENTER ENTER HDD Folder 002 Folder2 Files 999 Folder 999 MB 100.0 G Remain 1/3 PhotoViewer HDD 002 Folder2 003 Folder3 004 Folder4 005 Folder5 006 Folder6 007 Folder7 008 Folder8 001 Folder1 Select Folder FOLDER MENU Start Slideshow Start Audio Slideshow New Folder Folder Options Copy to DVD Multi-Mode Note 1 • There is a limit to the number of files/a mo unt of data that you c an copy at one time. • Only DCF format files in DCIM folders ca n be copied to a recordable DVD-R/-RW. ENTER HDD Folder 002 Folder2 Files 999 Folder 999 MB 100.0 G Remain 1/3 PhotoViewer HDD 002 Folder2 003 Folder3 004 Folder4 005 Folder5 006 Folder6 007 Folder7 008 Folder8 001 Folder1 Select Folder FOLDER MENU Multi-Mode ENTER DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 97 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
The PhotoViewer 11 98 En Important • Use a blan k DVD-R/-RW disc , or one that has already b een initialized f or Video mode recording but has nothing yet recorde d on it. Discs th at have already been recorded on (as well as CD-R/-RW discs) cannot be used. • After backing up the pictures in your digital camera to DVD, we recommend verifying that they have been recorded properly be fore deleting a nything from the camera. 1 Press HOME MENU and select ‘PhotoVi ewer’ to display the PhotoViewer s creen. 2 Load a bl ank (or unrecorded Video mode) DVD-R or DVD -RW disc. 3 Select ‘Copy Files fro m a Digital Camera’ from the menu. 4 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel. • Note that during copying, any timer programmes set to start will not begin, and no other operation s are possible. Copying selected files to a DVD-R/-RW This feature allows you just to copy some of the files stored on HDD to a DVD. A slideshow of th e files is also recorded on the disc as a Video mode title, making i t possible to view the pho tos on other DVD players/recorders that may not be compatible with JPEG file playback. Note however that you m ay need to finalize the d i s c b e f o r e i t w i l l p l a y o n a n o t h e r D V D p l a y e r (copying selected files doesn’t automatically finalize th e disc). Important • A maximum of 99 slideshow titles can be recorded. • One slideshow title can co ntain up to 99 files. If there are more files than this in the slideshow, multiple slideshows are created on the disc. • If you erase a slideshow title from a DVD the slideshow will become unplayable but the free space will not increase. 1 Load a blank (or un finalized Video mode) DVD-R or DVD -RW disc. 2 Select ‘View/Edit Photo s on the HDD’ from the menu. 3 Select the file(s) or folder(s) you want to copy. • Copying a folder will cop y all the files contained in it. • To copy multiple f olders, use the Multi- Mode; see Selecting multip le files or folders on page 97. 4 Select ‘Copy to DVD’ from the menu. 5 Select ‘Y es’ to confirm o r ‘No’ to cancel. • Folder names on the disc will be number PIONR . File names wi ll be PHOT number. • Note that during copying, any timer programmes set to start will not begin, and no other operation is p ossible. •W h i l e ‘C ancel’ is disp layed, you can press ENTER to cancel. ENTER View/Edit Photos on the HDD View Photos on a USB Device Copy Files from a Digital Camera View Photos on a CD/DVD ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 98 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
The PhotoViewer 99 En 11 Editing files on the HDD There are a numbe r of commands you can use to edit and organize your pictures stored on the HDD. Creating a new folder 1 From the folder list, d isplay the menu. 2 Select ‘New Folder’. The folder appears at the bottom of the folder list with the name F_ number . • There can be up to 999 folders on the HDD. Erasing a file or folder 1 Select the fil e(s) or folder(s) you want to erase. • To erase multiple files o r folders, use the Multi-Mode; see Se lecting multiple fi les or folders on page 97. • Erasin g a folder will erase all the fi les contained in it . Please be careful! • You can’t erase files that have been locked. • Folders containing lo cked files can’t be erased. Unlocked files in the folder, however, will be erased. 2 Display the comman d menu. 3 Select ‘File Opti ons’ or ‘Folder Options’. 4 Select ‘Era se’ or ‘Erase Folder’. 5 Select ‘Y es’ to confirm o r ‘No’ to cancel. • You can also er ase a file or folder by pressing CLEAR when the file or folder is highlighted. Press ENTER to conf irm. Copying files 1 Select the file(s) or folder(s) you want to copy. • Copying a folder will cop y all the files contained in it. • To copy multiple fil es or folders, use the Multi-Mode; see Se lecting multiple fi les or folders on page 97. 2 Display the command menu. ENTER HDD Folder 002 Folder2 Files 999 Folder 999 MB 100.0 G Remain 1/3 PhotoViewer HDD 002 Folder2 003 Folder3 004 Folder4 005 Folder5 006 Folder6 007 Folder7 008 Folder8 001 Folder1 Select Folder FOLDER MENU Start Slideshow Start Audio Slideshow New Folder Folder Options Copy to DVD Multi-Mode ENTER HDD File 001 PIOR0000 002 PIOR0001 003 PIOR0002 004 PIOR0003 005 PIOR0004 006 PIOR0005 007 PIOR0006 008 PIOR0007 009 PIOR0008 010 PIOR0009 011 PIOR0010 012 PIOR0011 100.0 G Remain 1/84 PhotoViewer HDD Folder2 Folder Size 999 MB 12 Files FILE MENU Start Slideshow Start Audio Slideshow File Options Print Copy to DVD Detailed Information Multi-Mode ENTER HDD File 001 PIOR0000 002 PIOR0001 003 PIOR0002 004 PIOR0003 005 PIOR0004 006 PIOR0005 007 PIOR0006 008 PIOR0007 009 PIOR0008 010 PIOR0009 011 PIOR0010 012 PIOR0011 100.0 G Remain 1/84 PhotoViewer HDD Folder2 Folder Size 999 MB 12 Files FILE MENU Start Slideshow Start Audio Slideshow File Options Print Copy to DVD Detailed Information Multi-Mode Erase Copy Rename File Lock Cancel ENTER DVRLX70_TF_E N.book 99 ページ ２００７ 年８月１日　水曜日　 午後４時１４分
The PhotoViewer 11 100 En 3 Select ‘File Opti ons’ or ‘Folder Options’. 4 Select ‘Copy’ or ‘C opy Folder Contents’. 5 Select a fold er to copy the folder(s)/file(s) to . 6 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel. • Copying to th e HDD will not work if there is insufficient space on the HDD; if there are already the maximum number of files and/or folders on the HDD. Naming files and folders 1 Select the file or folder you want to rename. You can’t rename files that have been locke d. 2 Display the comman d menu. 3 Select ‘File Opti ons’ or ‘Folder Options’. 4 Select ‘Rename File’ or ‘Rename Folder’. 5 Enter a new name for the file/folder. File names or Folder names can be u p to 64 character s long. See Using the remote key shortcuts to input a name and Using a USB keyboard to enter a name on page 71 for how to enter a name. Locking/Unlocking files Locking files will protect them from accidental erasure and prevent them from being renamed. Use the same process to both lock and unlock files. Locked files are displayed in the PhotoViewer with a padlock icon. 1 Select the file(s) you want to lock (or unlock). • To lock/unl ock multiple files or folders, use th e Multi-Mode; see Selecting mult iple file s or f olders on page 97. 2 Display the command menu. 3 Select ‘File Opti ons’ or ‘Folder Options’. ENTER ENTER HDD File 001 PIOR0000 002 PIOR0001 003 PIOR0002 004 PIOR0003 005 PIOR0004 006 PIOR0005 007 PIOR0006 008 PIOR0007 009 PIOR0008 010 PIOR0009 011 PIOR0010 012 PIOR0011 100.0 G Remain 1/84 PhotoViewer HDD Folder2 Folder Size 999 MB 12 Files FILE MENU Start Slideshow Start Audio Slideshow File Options Print Copy to DVD Detailed Information Multi-Mode Erase Copy Rename File Lock Cancel ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER HDD File 001 PIOR0000 002 PIOR0001 003 PIOR0002 004 PIOR0003 005 PIOR0004 006 PIOR0005 007 PIOR0006 008 PIOR0007 009 PIOR0008 010 PIOR0009 011 PIOR0010 012 PIOR0011 100.0 G Remain 1/84 PhotoViewer HDD Folder2 Folder Size 999 MB 12 Files FILE MENU Start Slideshow Start Audio Slideshow File Options Print Copy to DVD Detailed Information Multi-Mode Erase Copy Rename File Lock Cancel ENTER DVRLX70_TF_EN.bo ok 100 ページ ２００７年８月 １日　水曜日　午 後４時１４分
The PhotoViewer 101 En 11 4 Select ‘Loc k’ or ‘Lock Folder Contents’. Locked files are shown with a padlock icon next to them. To remove all locks with in a given folder, choose ‘Folder Option’ > ‘Unlock Fo lder Conten ts’ . To view detailed information This feature allows you to check the settings of the camera from which you imported the photos. 1 Choose th e file for which yo u would like to see deta iled info rmation. 2 Choose ‘D etailed Inform ation’. When no d etailed inform ation is avail able, nothing is di splayed. Printing files Connecting a PictBri dge-compatible p rinter to the USB port will enable you to print out picture f iles 1 stored on the HDD, a CD/DVD or directly from a digital camera. Make sure that the printer (and your digital camera if you are using tha t as a source) is connected to the recorder before starting. 1 Select the file(s) you want to print. • To print multiple fi les, use the Multi - Mode; see Selecting multip le files or folders on page 97. 2 Display the command menu. 3 Select ‘Print’ from the menu. 4 Select ‘Start’ to con firm or ‘Cancel’ to ca ncel. • Once printing h as started, you can cancel b y pressing ENTER . Tip • Paper size and la yout can be set; the options available depe nd on your prin ter — check the printer m anual for details. • This recorder may not wo rk correctly with al l printers. Note 1 Picture files should be standard DCF form at. Non-standard files may not print properly. ENTER HDD File 001 PIOR0000 002 PIOR0001 003 PIOR0002 004 PIOR0003 005 PIOR0004 006 PIOR0005 007 PIOR0006 008 PIOR0007 009 PIOR0008 010 PIOR0009 011 PIOR0010 012 PIOR0011 100.0 G Remain 1/84 PhotoViewer HDD Folder2 Folder Size 999 MB 12 Files FILE MENU Start Slideshow Start Audio Slideshow File Options Print Copy to DVD Detailed Information Multi-Mode Erase Copy Rename File Lock Cancel ENTER HDD File 001 PIOR0000 002 PIOR0001 003 PIOR0002 004 PIOR0003 005 PIOR0004 006 PIOR0005 007 PIOR0006 008 PIOR0007 009 PIOR0008 010 PIOR0009 011 PIOR0010 012 PIOR0011 100.0 G Remain 1/84 PhotoViewer HDD Folder2 Folder Size 999 MB 12 Files FILE MENU Start Slideshow Start Audio Slideshow File Options Print Copy to DVD Detailed Information Multi-Mode ENTER DVRLX70_TF_EN.bo ok 101 ページ ２００７年８月 １日　水曜日　午 後４時１４分
The Disc Setup menu 12 102 En Chapter 12 The Disc Setup menu From the Disc Setup menu you can name discs, lock the conte nts to prevent accidental recording and erasure, initia lize and finalize discs. The Disc Setup menu is accessed from the Home menu. Basic settings Input Disc Name When you i nitialize a disc for recording, th e recorder automatica lly assigns a name for the disc ranging from DISC 1 to DISC 99 . You can use the Input Disc Nam e function to change the default disc name to something more descript ive. This name a ppears when you load the disc and when you display disc information on-screen. 1 Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the Home Menu. 2 Select ‘Basic’ > ‘Input Di sc Name’ > ‘Next Scre en’. 3 Input a name for the disc. The disc name can be up to 6 4 characters long for a VR mode disc, or 40 for a Video mode discs and DVD R/ RW. • See Title Name on page 70 for more on navigating the input screen. Lock Disc •D e f a u l t s e t t i n g : Off Locking the disc will pr event accidental recording, editing or erasing of the disc. Important • A locked disc can still be initialized (which will completely erase the disc). 1 Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the Home Menu. 2 Select ‘Basic’ > ‘Loc k Disc’ then ‘On’ or ‘Off’. Set to On to prevent accidental recording, editing or erasing o f the disc loaded. If you n e e d t o u n l o c k t h e d i s c t o m a k e e d i t s , s e l e c t Off . DVD-RW Auto Initialize •D e f a u l t s e t t i n g : VR Mode Initializati on mode is aut omatically ca rried out when you insert a bla nk DVD-RW. You must set the desired initial ization mode before inserting a disc. See DVD-RW Auto Init ialize on pa ge 50 for detailed ins tructions. DVD ( VR) DVD ( Video) DVD R DVD RW DVD-RAM HOME MENU ENTER Basic Initialize Finalize Optimize HDD Disc Setup Input Disc Name Lock Disc DVD-RW Auto Init. Basic Input Disc Name Next Screen Input Disc Name ENTER DVD ( VR) DVD-RAM HOME MENU ENTER Basic Initialize Finalize Optimize HDD Disc Setup Input Disc Name Lock Disc DVD-RW Auto Init. Basic On Off Lock Disc DVD-RW DVRLX70_TF_EN.bo ok 102 ページ ２００７年８月 １日　水曜日　午 後４時１４分
The Disc Setup menu 103 En 12 Initialize settings You can i nitialize a recor dable DVD-R/-RW disc for either VR mode or Video mode recording. The first time you load a new DVD-RW disc, it will be automatic ally initialize d for recording according to the DVD-RW Auto Init. sett ing in the Disc Setup me nu (see page 50). New DVD-R discs are ready for Video mode recording when you load them, but it is also possible to init ialize them for VR mode recording. 1 DVD RW and DVD-RA M discs can also be initiali zed as a way of erasing the enti re disc. When initializing a DVD- RAM disc, select VR mode. See Initiali zing recordable D VD discs on page 49 for detailed instructions. Finalize settings Finalize Finalizing ‘fixes’ the re cord ings in place so that the disc can be played on a regular DVD player or computer equi pped with a suitable DVD-ROM drive. It is also possibl e to finalize DVD RW discs. T hi s is o nl y ne c es s a ry i f y o u w a n t t o a p la y e r to display a title menu for the disc . See Playing your record ings on o ther DVD players o n page 48 for detailed instructions. Undo Finalize You can undo the finalization on DVD-RW discs recorded on this recorder in Video mode. You need to do this if you want to record more material o r edit material already on the disc. You can also undo the f inalization of VR mode discs which have been final i zed on other DVD recorders. If when you lo ad a disc the message This disc cannot be recorded. Undo the finalization. is displayed, use this command to be able to record on the disc using this recorder. 1 Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the Home Menu. 2 Select ‘Finalize’ > ‘Undo Finalize’ then ‘Start’. Optimize HDD As you record, erase and edit recordings, the HDD file system gradually becomes fragmented. Periodically , the HDD will need optimizing to ‘clean u p’ all the fragmented files. When the HDD needs optimizin g the recorder will automatically d isplay a message recommending optimization. Important • Optimizing the HDD can ta ke as long as eight hours. Duri ng optimization, playback and recording are not possible. • Cancellin g optimization m id-way does not undo the optimization already done, so the HDD will be partly optimized. Note 1 Once initialized for VR mode recording it is not possible to re-initialize the disc for Video mode recording. Also, once recorded in Video mode, the disc canno t be re-initialized for VR mode recording. DVD-R DVD-RW DVD RW DVD-RAM DVD-R DVD-RW DVD R DVD RW DVD-RW HOME MENU ENTER HDD DVRLX70_TF_EN.bo ok 103 ページ ２００７年８月 １日　水曜日　午 後４時１４分
The Disc Setup menu 12 104 En 1 Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the Home Menu. 2 Select ‘Optimize HDD’ then ‘Start’. A progress bar indica tes how long there is left to go. If no actions a re carried out for more than 20 min utes after the optimization process is completed, the unit turns itself off. Initialize HDD When your HDD/DVD recorder is working without a problem this option is not vi sible in the Disc Setup menu. Howeve r, if the HDD file sy stem bec omes cor rupted for s ome reason, you can initialize the HDD to fix the problem. N ote that initial izing the HDD w ill erase all the data on it. 1 Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the Home Menu. 2 Select ‘Initiali ze HDD’ then ‘Start’. HOME MENU ENTER Basic Initialize Finalize Optimize HDD Disc Setup Optimize HDD Optimize HDD Start Optimize HDD HDD HOME MENU ENTER Basic Initialize Finalize Optimize HDD Disc Setup Initialize HDD Optimize HDD Start Initialize HDD DVRLX70_TF_EN.bo ok 104 ページ ２００７年８月 １日　水曜日　午 後４時１４分
The Video Adjust menu 105 En 13 Chapter 13 The Video Adjust menu Using the Video Adjust menu you can set up the picture quality for the built-in tuner and external inputs, fo r disc playback, and for recording. Setting the picture quality for TV and external inputs Picture Creation lets you choose a set of picture q uality setting s for the built- in TV tuner and for each external input. There are several preset settings that suit various sources, or you can crea te up to three of your own sets. Important • U nless otherwise stated, the OSDs shown in this manual are for the Taiwan and Philippines model. Choosing a preset 1 With the recorder stopped, press to display the Home Menu. 2 Select ‘Video Adjust’. 3 Select a preset. •U s e t h e INPU T SELECT button to switch between the built-in TV tuner and the extern al inputs. •U s e t h e  PRE V / NEXT buttons to change t he channel of the built-in TV tuner. There are six presets available: • Tuner – suitab le for general TV broadcasts • VCR – suitable f or video cassettes • DTV/LDP – sui table for digital broadcasts and Laserdiscs • Memory1 – user preset 1 • Memory2 – user preset 2 • Memory3 – user preset 3 You can press DISPL AY to see the individual settings for the current preset ( Tuner , VC R or DTV/LDP ). Creating your own set There are three user presets in which you can save your own set of pictu re quality settings. 1 Follo w Choosin g a pres et above and select one of the user presets (Memory 1, 2 or 3). 2 Select ‘Detailed Setting s’. 3 Select th e setting you want to adjust. HOME MENU ENTER ENTER Detailed Settings 2ch Tu n e r ENTER Detailed Settings 2ch Memory1 ENTER Memory1 3-D Y/C Motion Still PureCinma Prog. Motion Auto Motion Still 2ch Detail CNR YNR White AGC Off Max Off Off Max Max Off DVRLX70_TF_EN.bo ok 105 ページ ２００７年８月 １日　水曜日　午 後４時１４分
The Video Adjust menu 13 106 En You can adjust the following setti ngs: • Prog. Motion – Adj usts the motion and still picture quality when video outpu t is set to progressive. • PureCi nema – This setting optimizes the picture for film material when the video output is set to progressive. Usually set to Auto ; but try switching to Off if the picture appe ars unnatural. • 3-D Y/C – Adjusts th e brightness/ colour separation. • YNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduct ion (NR) applie d to the Y( b r i g h t n e s s ) c o m p o n e n t . • CNR – Adjusts the amount of n oise reduct ion (NR) applie d to the C (c olour) component. • Detail – Adjusts how sharp edges appear . • White AGC – Turn on for automatic white level adjustment. • White Level – Adjusts the intensity of white. • Black Level – Adjusts the inte nsity of black. • Black Setup – Corrects the standard reference black level (525 Input Line System only). • Hue – Adjusts overall balance between red and green. • Chroma Level – Adjusts how rich the colour s appear. 4 Adjust the currently selected setting. 5 Press to exit. You can now use the preset for any other input or the built-in TV tuner. Tip • To see more of the picture as you adjust different settings, press ENTER after selecting the setting you want to adjust. Setting the picture quality for disc playback This sett ing determin es how the picture will look when playing discs. Choosing a preset 1 With a disc playing (o r paused), press to display the Home Menu. 2 Select ‘Video Adjust’. 3 Select a setting. There are six presets available: • TV – suitable for LCD and cathod e-ray tube TVs • PDP – suitable for plasma displa y screens • Professional – suit able for professional moni tors • Memory1 – user preset 1 • Memory2 – user preset 2 • Memory3 – user preset 3 You can press DISPL AY to see the individual settings for the current preset ( TV , PDP or Profession al ). Creating your own set There are three user presets in which you can save your own set of pictu re quality settings for disc playback. 1 Follo w Choosin g a pres et above and select one of the user presets (Memory 1, 2 or 3). ENTER HOME MENU HOME MENU ENTER ENTER Detailed Settings TV DVRLX70_TF_EN.bo ok 106 ページ ２００７年８月 １日　水曜日　午 後４時１４分
The Video Adjust menu 107 En 13 2 Move the cursor down and select ‘Detai led Settin gs’. 3 Select the picture quality setting you want to adjust. You can adjust the following setti ngs: • Prog. Motion – Adj usts the motion and still picture quality when video outpu t is set to progressive. (Prog. Motion is ineffective when PureCinema is On .) • PureCi nema – This setting optimizes the picture for film material when the video output is set to progressive. Usually set to Auto 1 but try switching to Auto 2 , On or Off if the picture appears unnatural. • Subtit le Adjust – When the video output is set to progressive scan, it’s possible that the subtitles in some movies wil l disappear unna turally. In this case select the On setting. • YNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduct ion (NR) applie d to the Y( b r i g h t n e s s ) c o m p o n e n t . • CNR – Adjusts the amount of n oise reduct ion (NR) applie d to the C (c olour) component. • BNR – Adjusts the amount of n oise reduct ion (NR) app lied to the blo ck noise (artefacts visible in areas of flat colo ur, caused by MPEG co mpression). • MNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reductio n (NR) applied t o the mosquito noise (artefacts visible around the edges of an image, caused by M PEG compression). • Sharpness High – Adjusts th e sharpness of the high-frequency (detailed) elements in the picture. • Sharpness Mi d – Adjusts the sharpness of the mid-frequency (less detailed) elements in the picture. • Detail – Adjusts how sharp edges appear . • White Level – Adjusts the inte nsity of white. • Black Level – Adjusts the in tensity of black. • Black Setup – Corrects the standard reference black level. The Black Setup setting is only valid f or NTSC video and S-Video ou tput signals. • Gamma Correc tion – Adjusts the bright ness of darker ima ges. • Hue – Adjusts overall balance between red and green. • Chroma Level – Adjusts how rich the colours ap pear. • Chroma Delay – Adjust to correct the gap between the Y and C components in the video signal. 4U s e t h e / buttons to adjust the currently selected picture quality setting. 5 When you ha ve all the settings as yo u want them, press HOME MENU to exit. Tip • To see more of the picture a s you adjust different settings, press ENTER after selecting the setting you want to adjust. Detailed Settings Memory1 Memory1 Subtitle Adjust Motion Still PureCinma Prog. Motion Auto1 On YNR CNR Max Max Off Off Max Max Off Off BNR MNR DVRLX70_TF_EN.bo ok 107 ページ ２００７年８月 １日　水曜日　午 後４時１４分
The Initial Setup menu 14 108 En Chapter 14 The Initial Setup menu Using the Initial Setup menu The Initial Setup m enu is where you can set various recorder options for sound, picture, language and so on. Some settings can only be changed when the recorder is stopped. During playba ck and recording these settings are grayed out in the Initial Setu p menu. Except for the Setup Navigator, menu screens are exited automatically after 20 minutes o f inactivity. • Press HOME MENU and select ‘Initial Setup’. In the table below, the default option is marked with a •. Setting Options Explanation Basic Clock Setting Auto Set the channel that broadc asts a clock signal and the clock will be set automatically . Manual • If there is no channel that broadcasts a clock signal in your area, you can set the time and date manually . Display Set preferences for time and date display format. The clock must be set in order to use timer record ing. Input Line System 525 System Use for NTSC or P AL -60 recording from an external input. 625 System Use for standard P AL or SECAM recording. Taiwan and Philip pines model: Default setting is 525 System . Other: Default setting is 625 System . See also About the input line system on pa ge 119 for more information on this setting. Power Save (except Taiwan and Philippi nes model) On No antenna input signals are passed through to the outputs when the recorder is in standby . Off • When the rec order is in standby , all signals arr iving at the antenna inputs are passed along to the outputs. HELP Setting On • Switches on the automatic Help screens for GUI displays. Off Switches off the automatic Help screens for GUI displays. (P ress HELP on the remote to manually display the Help screen .) Setup Navigator Start Select to start the Setup Navigator . See also Switching on and setting up on page 29. DVRLX70_TF_EN.bo ok 108 ページ ２００７年８月 １日　水曜日　午 後４時１４分
The Initial Setup menu 109 En 14 Tuner Auto Channel Setting (Taiwan and Philippi nes model) Antenna • Select if you receive channels from an antenna. It takes a few moments for the auto tuning to complete. Cable Select if you receive channels via cable. It takes a few moments for the auto tuning to complete. Auto Channel Setting (Other) Next Screen P roceed to the next screen, select your country , then wait for automatic tuning to complete. The channel mapping screen should appe ar when the recorder is set up. P ress ENTER to exit this screen . Manual CH Setting Next Screen P roceed to the next screen if you need to adjust any of the settings made by auto tuning. Select your countr y , then proc eed to the manual channel setting screen: • Change channel presets using the  PREV /  NEXT buttons. • T o skip the displayed chan nel (because there is no station assigned to that channel), change th e Skip setting to On . • Set the CH System setting to match the channel system of your countr y or region ( except Taiwan and Philippine s model ). • Set the Channel setting to the channel you want to assign to the current channel preset ( except Taiwan and Philippines model ). • T o manually fine tune the channel, change the AFT setting to Off then adjust the Level setting. • Set the Sound System setting to match the sound system of your region ( except Taiwan and Philippines model ). • The Name field allows you to input a name of up to five characters for the current channel preset ( except Taiwan and Philippines model ). Channel Swapping (except Taiwan and Philippi nes model) Next Screen P roceed to the next screen to swap channel assignments of different presets so that you can group together presets that naturally go together . Select two presets to swap then press ENTER . G-Code CH Setting Next Screen Proceed to the next screen to assign channel numbers to the guide channe ls as necessar y . Look in your TV guide to see which channel numbers should be assigned to which guide channels. P ress ENTER when your done to leave this screen . Setting Options Explanation DVRLX70_TF_EN.bo ok 109 ページ ２００７年８月 １日　水曜日　午 後４時１４分
The Initial Setup menu 14 110 En Video In/Out Input Colour System Next Screen P roceed to the next screen to set the input colour system for the external input and the built-in TV tuner . Use the CH /– buttons to change the preset. On the default Auto setting the recorder can generally correctly detect whether the input sig nal is P AL, SECAM, 3.58 NTSC or P AL-60, but in some cases you may have to set it manually if the picture is displayed incorrectly . See also About the input colour system on page 119 for more information on this setting. Component Vid eo Out Interlace • Select if your monitor/TV is not compatible with progressive-scan video. Progressive Select if your monitor/TV is progressive-scan compatible. Check the operatin g instructions that came with your monitor/TV if you’re not sure. If your TV is incom patible w ith progre ssive sca n video an d you selec t Progres sive , you will not be a ble to see any picture at all. In t his case, press  OPEN/CLOSE while holding do wn the  (S top) butto n on the front pane l to switch to Interlace (this also switches Scree n Resol ution on page 116 to the default sett ing). NTSC on PAL TV On NTSC discs will play co rr ectly on P AL -only TVs. Off • Use if your TV is already NT SC -compatible. Many recent PAL TVs are compatible with NTSC input and so this settin g can be swit ched off. Che ck the op erating instructions that came with your TV. See also About NTSC on PAL TV on page 119 for related informa tion. Audio In NICAM Select (except Taiwan and Philippi nes model) NICAM • Record the NICAM audio in a NICAM broadcast. Regular Audio Record the non-NICAM audio in a NICAM broadcast. (Y ou can still switch the audi o to record using the AUDIO button before recording.) Tuner Level (except Taiwan and Philippi nes model) Normal • Standard setting. Compression Use if the audio level from the built-in tuner is excessive, causing distortion. External Audio Stereo • Select if the audio from the currently selected external input is standard stereo . Dual Mono/ Bilingual Select if each channel carries a separate soundtrack. When the e xternal aud io is from t he DV input, an audi o subcode channel withi n the DV audio tells the recorder whether the audio is stereo or dual mono/bilingual. This has priority over th e setting you make her e. Setting Options Explanation DVRLX70_TF_EN.bo ok 110 ページ ２００７年８月 １日　水曜日　午 後４時１４分
The Initial Setup menu 111 En 14 Dual Mono Recording (Taiwan and Philippi nes model) L • Select to record the left c h annel of an external dual mono source when recording to DVD in Video mode, to HDD with HDD Recording F ormat set to Video Mode On, or in LPCM mode. R As above, but for right chann el recording. When recor ding dual mono audi o to DVD in VR mode (except in LPCM mode), or to HDD with HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode Off (except i n LPCM mode), both au dio channels are re corded and you can switch to the one you wan t on playback. Bilingual Recording (Other) A/L • Record the left (A) channel of a biling ual source when recording to HDD with HDD Recording F ormat set to Vi deo Mode On, to DVD in Video mode or in LPCM mode, from an external source. B/R As above, but for right (B) chan nel recording. When recordin g bilingual audio to DVD in VR mode (except in LPCM mode), o r to HDD with HDD Recording Form at set to Video Mode Off (except in LPCM mo de), both audio cha nnels are reco rd ed and you can switch to the one you want on playback. DV Input Stere o 1 • Select to use the ‘live’ audio track (recorded during the video shoot) from a ca mcorder that supports two ster eo audio tracks . Stereo 2 Select to use the overdubbed audio track from a camcorder that supports two stereo audio tracks. Mix Select one of the three settings to use a mix of the two st ereo au dio tra cks. Audio Out Dolby Digital Ou t Dolb y Digital • Output a Dolby Digital signal when a Dolby Digital source is being played. Dolby Digital  PCM Convert Dolby Digital sources to Linear PCM output. Use if your connected equipment doesn ’t have a Dolby Digital decoder . DTS Out On • Output a DTS signal when a DTS source is being played. Off Switch off the digital outp ut when a DTS source is being played. Use when yo ur connected equipment doesn ’t have a DTS decoder . In this case, use the analog audio outputs. 96 kHz PCM Out 96 kHz  48 kHz • Convert 96 kHz digital audio sources to 48 kHz output. Use if your connected equipment doesn’t support 96 kHz sampling rate. 96 kHz Output 96 kHz digital audio when a 96 kHz source is being played. Setting Options Explanation DVRLX70_TF_EN.bo ok 111 ページ ２００７年８月 １日　水曜日　午 後４時１４分
The Initial Setup menu 14 112 En MPEG Out MPEG Output an MPEG audio sign al when a source using MPEG audio is being played. MPEG  PCM • Convert sources with MPEG audio to Linear PCM output. Use if your connected equipment doesn’t have an MPEG audio decoder . Audio DRC On Switches on Audio DRC (Dynamic Range Control). Use when listening to Dolby Digital material at low volume. Off • Switches off Audio DRC. Audio DRC is not effectiv e when listening via the digita l output when the Dolby Digi t al Out setting is set to Dolby Digital . Langua ge OSD L anguage • (Taiwan and Philippi nes model) Sets the language of the on-screen displays to Chinese. English • (Other) Sets the language of the on-screen displays to English. available languages Choose from the languages displayed for the on- screen displays. Audio Languag e Chinese • (Taiwan and Philippi nes model) Sets the default audio language for DVD - Video playback to Chinese. English • (Other) Sets the default audio language for DVD - Video playback to English. available languages Choose from the languages displayed to set the default audio language for DVD- Video playback. Other Select to set the default audio language to something other than the ones listed. See Se lecting other languages for language options on page 120. Discs do not necessarily have audio in your selected language. Also, some discs ov erride the Aud io Language preference . Setting Options Explanation DVRLX70_TF_EN.bo ok 112 ページ ２００７年８月 １日　水曜日　午 後４時１４分
The Initial Setup menu 113 En 14 Subtitle Language Chinese • (Taiwan and Philippi nes model) Sets the default subtitle language for DVD - Video playback to Chinese. English • (Other) Sets the default subtitle language for DVD - Video playback to English. available languages Choose from the languages displayed to set the default subtitle language for DVD- Video playback. Other Select to set the default subtitle language to something other than the ones listed. See Se lecting other languages for language options on page 120. Discs do not necessarily have subtitle s in yo ur selected me nu language. Al so, some discs override the Subt itle Languag e preference. Auto Langua ge On • On this setting: • DVD- Video discs whose main audio track is in your default language wil l play using that language, without subtitles. • Discs whose main audio trac k is not in your defaul t language but that have a subtitle track in your default language will play the or iginal audio track with subtitles. Off Select to play DVD- Video discs according to your audio and subtitle language preferences. For Auto Lan guage to be effect ive, the Audio Langu age and Subtitle Langu age options must be set to th e same language. DVD Menu Langua ge w/Subtitle Langua ge • Sets the language of DVD- Video menus to the same as that set for the subtitle language. English Sets the language of DVD- Video menus to English. available languages Choose from the displayed lang uages to set the default language for DVD- Video menus. Other Select to set the DVD menu language to something other than the ones listed. See Selecting other languages for language options on page 120. Discs do not necessa rily have menus in your selected menu la nguage. Subtitle Display On • Select to have discs display subtitles according to your Subtitle Language and Auto Language preferences. Off Select to switch off subtitle display . Assist Subtitle Select to display special addi tional assistive subtitles, where available. Some discs may override these settings. Setting Options Explanation DVRLX70_TF_EN.bo ok 113 ページ ２００７年８月 １日　水曜日　午 後４時１４分
The Initial Setup menu 14 114 En Recording Manua l Recording On (go to setup) All the standard recording modes, plus MN1 to MN32 , LPCM and XP modes can be set. Off • Just the standard recording modes ( XP , SP , LP , EP , SLP and SEP ) can be set. See also Manual recording mode s on page 122 for detaile d information on manual reco rding levels. Optimiz ed Rec On The recording quality of timer recordings is automatically adjusted to fit on to the selected m edi a if it will not fit at the selected quality set ting. If the recording will not fit even at MN1 (MN4 for DVD R/ RW), then the recording w ill be made to the HDD in the original quality selected. Off • When a timer recording is se t that won ’t fit on to the selected media, the recording starts but is cut off when no more recording is possible. Optimized Rec will only compensate for the n ext scheduled tim er recording if more than on e is set. Set Thumbnail 0 seconds • Sets the default thumbnai l picture in the Disc Navigator to the first frame of the title. 30 seconds Sets the defaul t thumbnail picture to 30 seconds into the title. 3 minutes Sets the default thumbnail picture to three minutes into the title. Auto Chapter (HDD/VR) On • Wh en r ec or di ng t o t he H DD or in V R m od e t o a D VD , chapter marks are added at the black screen between commercials and main programming. When recording in DV , chapter marks can be changed by date/time. Off Automatic chapter mark ing is switched off . Auto Chapter (Video) No Separation Automatic chapter mark in g is switched off . 10 minutes • When recording in V ideo mode, chapter markers are inserted ever y 10 minutes. 15 minutes Chapter markers are inserted ever y 15 minutes. This settings ap plies to recording or re al-time copying to Video mod e DVD-R/-RW discs. Auto Chapter (DVD R/ RW) No Separation Automatic chapter mark in g is switched off . 10 minutes • When recording in DVD R/ RW , chapter markers are inserted ever y 10 minutes. 15 minutes Chapter markers are inserted ever y 15 minutes. This settings ap plies to recording or re al-time copying to DVD R/ RW d iscs. Setting Options Explanation DVRLX70_TF_EN.bo ok 114 ページ ２００７年８月 １日　水曜日　午 後４時１４分
The Initial Setup menu 115 En 14 HDD Recording Format Video Mode Off R ecord ings made to the HDD are made in VR mode. Use this setting if you don’t need to transfer the recording later to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R/ RW . Video Mo de On • R ecordings made to the HDD are compatible with V i deo mode recordings. This setting is c onvenient if you want to transfer the recording to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R/ RW as high-speed copy can be used. • Taiwa n and Phili ppines mode l: When Vide o Mode On is used, you must select th e audio channel you wan t to record when recording a broadc ast with a SAP channel. On the V ideo Mode Off setting, both channels will be recorded and you can switch betwe en them on pl ayback. See also Dual Mo no Recording on page 111. • Other: When Video Mode On is used, you must select the au dio channel you want to record when reco rding a biling ual broadcas t. On the Vide o Mode Off se tting, both channels will be recorded and you can switch between them on pla yback. See also Bili ngual Recording on pa ge 111. • When the record ing mode is set to XP , you cannot change HDD Recordin g Format. Playback TV Screen Size 4:3 (Letter Box) Select if you have a standard 4:3 TV and prefer the letter box format presentation for widescre en material. 4:3 (Pan & Scan) Select if you have a standard 4:3 TV and prefer the pan and scan presentation for widescreen materia l. 16:9 • Select if you have a widescreen 1 6:9 TV . Y our TV settings determine how 4:3 material will look. Select ing 4:3 (Le t ter Box) or 4:3 (Pan & Scan) does not guarante e that all video m a ter ial will be presen ted in that format as some discs override this setting. Still Picture Field P roduces a stable, generally shake-free image. Frame P roduces sharp image, but may be prone to shake. Auto • Generates a generally less sharp but more stable still image. Seamless Playback On Playback is smooth, but wi th a trade-off against the accuracy of the edit poi nts. Off • Y ou may notice momentar y interruption at edited points during playback of a VR mode Play List. This setting applie s to HDD, DVD- R/-RW ( VR) and DVD-RAM playback . Setting Options Explanation DVRLX70_TF_EN.bo ok 115 ページ ２００７年８月 １日　水曜日　午 後４時１４分
The Initial Setup menu 14 116 En Parental Lock Set Password In order to change th e parental lock level or change the countr y/area code, set the password using this option . F rom the following screen, enter a four -digit number that will be your password. Change Password In order to change the password, first enter your existing password and then a new one from the following screen. Change Level F rom the following screen, first enter your password and then set a parental lock level. Country/Area Code F r om the following screen , first enter your password and then set a countr y/area code. See Country/Are a code list on page 13 3. Only certain discs have pa rental lock and country/are a code features. Check the d isc packagin g to see what feat ures the dis c has. If you forget yo ur password you can reset it by resetting the recorder to its factory settings. See Resetting the recorder on page 136. Angle I ndicator On • A c amera icon appears on-screen during multi-angle scenes on a DVD- Video disc. Off Nothing is indicated on-sc reen when a multi-angle scene is showing. HDMI Output (only available when an HDMI device is connect ed) Screen Resolution 1920 x 1080 p Constant 1920 x 1080p output. 1920 x 1080i Constant 1 920 x 1080i output. 1280 x 720p Constant 1280 x 720p output. 720 x 576p (720 x 480p) Constant 720 x 576p output (when setting the Input Line System to 525 System , vid eo is output in 720 x 480p). 720 x 576i (720 x 480i) Constant 720 x 576i output (when setting the Input Line System to 525 System , vid eo is output in 720 x 480i). • Dependi n g on the co nnected device some settings m ay not be available . • If you choose a sett ing that is incompatible with your TV you may not be able to see any picture at all. In this case, press  OPEN/CLOSE wh ile holdin g down th e  (Stop) button on the fr ont panel to switch the setting (this also switches Compo nent Video Out on page 110 to the default setting). 4:3 Video Output Full Select if your HDMI TV allows you to change the aspect ratio . Normal Select if your HDMI TV do es not allow you to change the aspect ratio. 4:3 video will be shown with bars on each side. Setting Options Explanation DVRLX70_TF_EN.bo ok 116 ページ ２００７年８月 １日　水曜日　午 後４時１４分
The Initial Setup menu 117 En 14 Colour RGB (0–255) Use if colours are weak and black appears to ‘float’ on the RGB (16–235) setting. RGB (16–235) Use th is setting if colours appear overly rich and the black too deep on the RGB (0–255) setting. YCbCr 4:2:2 The video signal is output as a YCbCr 4:2:2 component signal. This is the standard setting for HDMI-compatible devices. YCbCr 4:4:4 The video signal is output as a YCbCr 4:4:4 component signal. • Dependi n g on the co nnected device some settings m ay not be available . • When a DVI device is connected, the YCbCr 4:2: 2 and YCbCr 4: 4:4 options are not available. Transmission Mode Auto Select this setting to ou tput video in the optimum transmission mode according to the connected device. Normal Select this setting when pictures are not shown properly . If you choos e a setting that is inc ompatible with your TV you may not be able to see any picture at all. In this case, press  OPEN/CLOSE wh ile holdin g down th e  (Stop) button on the front pa nel to switch the setting. Audio Ou tput Auto • Dolby Digital, MPEG and DTS sources are output as a bitstream signal. Howev er , depending on the Audio Out setting, number of audio channels, and the HDMI- connected device, Li near PCM audio may be output. PCM All audio signals are converted to Linear PCM (except DTS). Bitstream Priority Select if the connected device is compatible with bitstream audio. This setting is not ava ilable when a DVI device is connected. HDMI Control On • Enable th e HDMI Control function . Select this op tion when connected to an HDMI Control-compatible P ioneer plasma television, A V system (amplifier or A V receiver etc.). Off Disable the HDMI Control function . Select this option when not connected to an HDMI Control-compatible component, or when connected to a component manufactured by a company other than P ioneer . • For more i nformation about HDM I Control, see HDM I Control on p age 22. • This setting is ava ilable even if yo u are not connected to an HDMI device. • For more informa tion see Troublesh ooting on page 127. Setting Options Explanation DVRLX70_TF_EN.bo ok 117 ページ ２００７年８月 １日　水曜日　午 後４時１４分
The Initial Setup menu 14 118 En Options On Screen Display On • The recorder displays operation displays ( Stop , Play , etc.) on-screen. Off Switches off the on-screen operation displays. Front Panel Display On • T he time is shown in the fr ont panel display when the recorder is in standby . Off The front panel display is switched off i n standby . Remote Control Mode Recorder 1–3 (default : Recorder 1) If you are using more than one recorder in the same room, set them to different IDs. This setting sets the recorder ID; to change the remote controller ID, press and hold RETURN then press 1 , 2 or 3 to set. The remote will only control a recorder with the same ID. DivX VOD Registration Code Use to display the recorder ’s DivX registration code. See DivX video co mpatibility and DivX® VOD content on page 10. Set Preview (HDD only) Quick Preview • When in the Disc Naviga tor , the thumbnail video plays short excerpts from throughout the selected title. (Note that edited titles that will play normally from the beginning.) Normal The thumbnail video plays fr om the beginning of the title. Options 2 USB Restart USB Device If the connected USB device does not respond to the recorder , tr y using this option to restart it. If the device st ill does not work properly try switching it off then back on, and/or disconnecting then reconnecting the USB cable. Confirm Printer Use this option to confirm the make and model of the printer connected to the recorder (does not work with all printers). HDD Sleep Mode Proceed P uts the HDD to sleep. Using this feature when playing DVDs or CDs allows you to reduce noise produced by the unit, resulting in improved sou nd quality . When you wake the HDD back up it wi ll take a few seconds to load. The HDD can be taken out of Sleep Mode b y any number of actions, including: • T urning the power off and on again . • P ressing the HDD/DVD button and choosing the HDD. • When a timer recording begins. • When you tr y and make any changes to system settings. Setting Options Explan ation DVRLX70_TF_EN.bo ok 118 ページ ２００７年８月 １日　水曜日　午 後４時１４分
The Initial Setup menu 119 En 14 Additional information about the TV system settings About the input line system This reco rder is compatible with PAL, SECAM, 3.58 NTSC and PAL-60 TV systems. The Input Line System and Input Colour System settings determi n e how the recorder treats incoming video signals from an external inp ut or the bu ilt-in TV tune r. Please note the following points when changing the input lin e system: • If, when the Input Line System setting is changed, the screen goes blank (due to incompatib ility with your TV), yo u can switch back by pressing and holding the front pa nel  (Stop) button then pressing INPUT SELECT (also front panel) while the recorder is stopped. • When you switch the I nput Line System setting the Copy List is erased. If you switch the setting using the  (Stop) button and INPUT SELECT bu ttons as described above, there is no confirmation, so please use with care. • You can’ t mix recordings of dif ferent TV line systems on the same disc. • When you c hange this setting, the Inpu t Colour System setting also changes (page 119). About NTSC on PAL TV Depending on the In put Line System setting and the NTSC on PA L TV setting, the signal format output when th e recorder is stopped varies as shown in the table below. About the input colour system The available options of the In put Colour System setting depend on the Input Line System se tting. The tables be low show the different options available. Additional information about component video output If you switch the Component Video Out setting to Progressive when using a TV that is not compatible with progressive-scan video, you will not be able to see anything displayed on yo ur TV. If this happens, press and hold th e  (Stop ) button on the front panel, then press  OPEN/CLOSE . This will set the recorder’s video output back to Interlace. Input Line System NTSC on PAL TV Output when stopped 625 System O ff PAL On PAL 525 System O ff NTSC On PAL–60 Taiwan and Philippine s model: Input Line System Built-in tuner Exte rnal input 625 System n/a Auto PAL SECA M 525 System 3.58 NTSC Auto 3.58 NTSC PAL– 60 Other: Input Line System Built-in tuner Exte rnal input 625 System Auto Auto PAL PAL SECAM SECAM 525 System 3.58 NTSC Auto 3.58 NTSC PAL– 60 DVRLX70_TF_EN.bo ok 119 ページ ２００７年８月 １日　水曜日　午 後４時１４分
The Initial Setup menu 14 120 En Selecting other languages for language options 1 Select ‘Other’ from the language li st. This option appears in the settings for DVD Menu Language , Audio Language, and Subtitle Language. 2 Select the language you want. • Select by language name: Use the / buttons to change the language. • Select by code num ber: Press  then use the nu mber buttons to enter the four-digit language code. See Language code list on page 13 3 for a list of avai lable language s and correspond ing codes. ENTER ENTER Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Initial Setup OSD Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language DVD Menu Language Subtitle Display DVD Menu Language DVD Menu Language Language Number English 0 5 1 4 Language DVRLX70_TF_EN.bo ok 120 ページ ２００７年８月 １日　水曜日　午 後４時１４分
Additional information 121 En 15 Chapter 15 Additional information Minimum copying times The table below shows the minimum HDD to DVD copyi ng time for one hour of video. Please note that not all discs are compatible with high-spe ed copying. 1 Check with the disc manufactu rer for compatibility. Note that all times in the above table are ap proximate. Also that actual copy speed varies with the part of the disc being recorded. *1 Titles reco rded on DVD R/ RW i n SEP , SLP or EP modes can not be high-speed cop ied. Note 1 Depending on the disc, the cop y speed may be reduced (f or example, although a 6x disc is used, the co py may be ma de at 2 x speed) . Rec mode SEP SLP EP LP SP XP DVD disc type 1 0 h 8 h6 h4 h2 h1 h DVD-R/1x DVD-RW/1x 1x 6 mins. 7.5 mins. 10 m ins. 1 5 mins. 30 mins. 60 mins. DVD-RW/2x DVD-R DL DVD-RA M/2x 2x 3 mins. 4 mins. 5 mins. 7.5 mins. 15 mins. 30 mins. DVD R/2.4x DVD RW/2.4x DVD R DL 2.4x *1 *1 *1 6 .3 mins. 12.5 mi ns. 25 mins. DVD-RA M/3x DVD-RA M/5x 3x 2 mins. 2.5 mins. 3.5 mins. 5 mins. 10 mins. 20 mins. DVD-R/4x DVD-RW/4x DVD R /4x DVD RW/4x 4x 1.5 mins. *1 2 mins.*1 2.5 mins. *1 4 mins. 7.5 mins. 15 mins. DVD-R/8x/16x DVD R/8x/16x DVD-RW/6x DVD RW/8x 6x 1.25 mins. *1 1.6 mins . *1 2.2 mins. *1 3 mins. 5.5 mins. 11 mins. DVRLX70_TF_EN.bo ok 121 ページ ２００７年８月 １日　水曜日　午 後４時１４分
Additional information 15 122 En Manual recording modes The table below shows the approximate record ing times for different DVD types in each manual recording mode, as well as the sta ndard recording mode equivalents. For re cording time on th e HDD, see Speci fications on pa ge 137. *1 Recording time may be slightly shorter for certain disc types or recording modes. *2 The first figure refers to when the Input Line System is set to 525 System; the se cond when set to 625 System. *3 Modes MN1 to MN3 not available when using DVD R/ RW. *4 Titles record ed at MN6 or lower ca nnot be high-sp eed copied to DVD R / RW. *5 XP mode is available for HDD re cordings only. If set for a DVD record ing, the DVD w ill be automatical ly recorded in MN32 mode. Rec. time *1 Resolution *2 Level Single-Layer DVD: DVD-R/-RW DVD R/ RW DVD-RAM Dual-Layer DVD: DVD-R DL DVD R DL Video mode Off (HDD) VR mode (DVD-R/-RW) DVD-RAM VR mode (DVD-R DL) Video mode On (HDD) Video mode (DVD-R/-RW) DVD R/ RW Video mode (DVD-R DL) DVD R DL MN 1 *3,4 802 mins. 1440 mins. 352 x 240/ 352 x 288 352 x 240/ 352 x 288 MN 2 *3,4 720 mins. 1292 mins. MN 3 *3,4 SEP 600 mins. 1077 mins. MN 4 *4 SLP 480 mins. 861 mins. MN 5 *4 420 mins. 754 mins. MN 6 *4 EP 360 mins. 646 mins. MN 7 300 mins. 538 mins. 352 x 480/ 352 x 576 352 x 480/ 352 x 576 MN 8 270 mins. 484 mins. MN 9 LP 240 mins. 431 mins. 480 x 480/ 480 x 576 720 x 480/ 720 x 576 MN 10 230 mins. 413 mins. MN 11 220 mins. 395 mins. MN 12 210 mins. 377 mins. 544 x 480/ 544 x 576 MN 13 200 mins. 359 mins. MN 14 190 mins. 341 mins. MN 15 180 mins. 323 mins. MN 16 170 mins. 305 mins. 720 x 480/ 720 x 576 MN 17 160 mins. 287 mins. MN 18 150 mins. 269 mins. MN 19 140 mins. 251 mins. MN 20 130 mins. 233 mins. MN 21 SP 120 mins. 215 mins. MN 22 110 mins. 197 mins. MN 23 105 mins. 188 mins. MN 24 100 mins. 179 mins. MN 25 95 mins. 170 mins. MN 26 90 mins. 161 mins. MN 27 85 mins. 153 mins. MN 28 80 mins. 144 mins. MN 29 75 mins. 135 mins. MN 30 70 mins. 126 mins. MN 31 65 mins. 117 mins. MN 32 XP 61 mins. 111 mins. LPCM 61 mins. 111 mins. XP *5 --- mins. --- mins. DVRLX70_TF_EN.bo ok 122 ページ ２００７年８月 １日　水曜日　午 後４時１４分
Additional information 123 En 15 • Level s separated by a bold line sh ow where th ere is a noticeabl e change in pictur e quality. • Audio recording i n all manual recording modes is in Do lby Digital 2 ch format, except for LPCM mode, which is in Linear PCM format. • See also Record ing on page 32. Troubleshooting Incorrect opera tion is often mistaken for trouble and malfunc tion. If you think there is something wrong with this component, pl ea se check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in ano ther component. Investi gate the other componen ts and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after che cking the points be low, ask your near est Pioneer authorized service cent er or your dealer to carry out repair work. General Problem Remedy The disc is automatically ejected after closing the disc tray • Check that the disc is not an incompatible format disc (page 7). • Check that the disc is loaded pr operly (aligned in disc tray and label-side up). • T ake out the disc and clean it (page 135). • Check that the disc has a region code compatible with the recor der . Can’t eject a disc • T urn off the power to this device and press and hold  OPEN/ CLOSE on the front of the unit for more than three seconds. Can’t play a disc • Check that the disc is a compatible format disc (page 7). • T ake out the disc and clean it (page 135). • Check that the disc is loaded pr operly (aligned in disc tray and label-side up). • P ress HDD/DVD to select the DVD. • There may be condensation in th e recorder . Leave the recorder for an hour or so for the condensation to evaporate. • During HDD recording, you can ’t play discs that are recorded wi th a Line System different to the current recorder setting. • DVD R/ RW discs recorded using an other recorder with copy- once protected recordings will not play in this recorder . Can’t record a disc • Check that the disc is not an incompatible f or mat disc (page 7). • Some DVD-RAM discs are not reco rdable until they have been initialized (page 49). This can take up to an ho ur . No picture • Check that ever ything is connected properly (page 14). • Check that the connected TV and/or th e AV amplifier/receiv er is set to the correct input. • The recorder may be set to progre ssive scan with an incompatible TV . R eset to interlace by pressing and holding the front panel  (Stop) button then pressing  OPEN/CLOSE . All settings are reset • If the recorder is unplugged (or there is a power failure) while the recorder is on, all the settings will be lost. • Make sure that you switch th e recorder i nto standby before unplugging the power cord. DVRLX70_TF_EN.bo ok 123 ページ ２００７年８月 １日　水曜日　午 後４時１４分
Additional information 15 124 En Remote control does not work • If you connected this recorder to another Pionee r produc t using the CONTROL IN jack, point the remote control at the other component to use (page 14). • Set the remote control to the same ID number as the recorder (page 118). (When the batteries run down , the remote mode is automatically reset to Recorder1 .) • Use the remote within its operating range (page 6). • Replace the batteries (page 6). No soun d or sound is distorte d • Make sure that the ampl ifier/rece iver or TV is set to the correct input and the volume turn ed up. • There is no sound when the pictur e is paused, or during scanning or slow motion play . Pr ess  PLAY to resume regular playback. • DTS disc s can on ly be playe d if th is recorder is connected to a DTS decoder or DTS compatible amplifie r/receiver . If you have connected a suitable decoder , also make sure that the Initial Setup > Aud io Out > DTS Out setting is On . • Some 96 kHz discs do not output audio through the digital jack. In this cas e, switch the input o f your amplifier/rece iver to analog. • Check the audio cable connections (page 14). • If the sound is distorted, tr y cleaning the cable plugs. Cannot switch a d ual mono/bilingual programme • During real-time copying it i s not possible to switch audio channels. The main and sub channels are both output. The picture is distorte d • Change the Input Line System se tting (page 108). (Y ou can also change it by pressing the  (Stop) button and INPUT SELECT on the front panel simultaneously wi th the recorder stopped.) The picture from the external input is distorte d • If the video signal from the exte rnal component is copy-protected, you cannot connect via this re corder . Connect the component directly to your TV . Screen is stretched vertically or horizontally • Make sure that the TV Screen Size setting (page 115) is correct for the kind of TV you have (see also page 134). • If you have a widescreen TV , check its aspect ratio settings. • This recorder ’s input switches i nto wide mode automatically according to the input signal. Wh en the unit connected is not compatible with VIDEO ID -1 (widescreen signalling), set the connected component to output 4: 3 aspect ratio (standard) video. Problem Remedy DVRLX70_TF_EN.bo ok 124 ページ ２００７年８月 １日　水曜日　午 後４時１４分
Additional information 125 En 15 Can’t play a disc recorded using this recorder on another player • If the disc was recorded in DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R , make sure that it’s finalized (page 48). • Some players will not play re cordab le DVD disc s, even when recorded in DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R and fina lized. • If the disc was recorded in VR mode, the other player must be specifically RW compatible in order to play it (page 7 ). • Discs recorded with copy- once material cannot be played on non- CPRM compatible players (page 35). • DVD RW discs containing only a sm a ll amoun t of recor ded mate rial may not play on oth er players. Finalize the disc and tr y again. During playback the picture is dark or distorte d • When a c opy-protected disc is played via a VCR, the picture will not display correctly . Connect the re corder directly to your TV . Recorded contents are not clear or artefacts appear in areas of flat colour (due to MPEG compression; also known a s block noise ) • Change the recording mode to XP / SP . Can’t record or does not record successfully • Check that there is some rema ining blank space on the DVD/HDD. • F or a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R , check that the disc isn ’t already finalized. • Check the limits on the number of titles and chapters on a disc: – HDD: 999 titles – VR mode: 99 titles, 999 chapters per disc – Video mode disc: 99 titles per disc, 99 chapters p er ti tle – DVD R/ RW : 49 titles per disc, 99 chapters per title (max 254 chapters per disc) • Check that the source you are tr ying to rec ord is not copy protect ed. • F or a VR formatted disc, check that the disc isn’t lo cked (page 102). • Check that you are recording with the same TV system (P AL, NTSC, etc.) as the disc has already been recorded in. All recordings on a disc must be in the same TV syst em. When recording to the HDD, it is also necessar y to set the Input Line System setting to match what you want to record (page 108). • The power may have failed during recordi ng. Timer prog ramme doesn’t record successfully • When setting the recording ch annel, make sure you s et the recorder ’s built-in TV tuner , not the TV ’s built-in tuner . • When recording to a DVD-R/-RW ( V ideo mode) or DVD R/ RW , programmes that are copy-once prot ected cannot be recorded. Use a VR mode formatted disc for copy-once material (page 35). • T wo timer programmes may have overlapped, in which case only the earlier one will record completely . • The power may have failed during recordi ng. • Check that the recorder ’s TV system (P AL, NTSC, etc.) settings are the same as the channel set for recording. Problem Remedy DVRLX70_TF_EN.bo ok 125 ページ ２００７年８月 １日　水曜日　午 後４時１４分
Additional information 15 126 En After briefly unpluggi ng or after a power failure the front panel display shows ‘--:--’ • A backup batter y inside the recorder keeps the clock and other settings from being reset when th ere is no power to the recorder . Af ter unplugging or a power fail ure, the batter y keeps all settings for some five years from the date it was shipped from the factory . Reset the clock and other recorder settings to use the recorder again. • T o have the batter y replaced, please ask your nearest P ioneer- authorized ser vice center or yo ur dealer to carr y out repairs. Front panel display shows ‘LOCKED’ when a button is pressed • The child lock is on; turn off in order to use the recorder (page 45). Can’t use One Touch Copy (HDD to DVD) • Make sure that there is a recordable DVD-R/-RW loaded with some free space for recording and fewer than 99 titles already on the disc. Also make sure that for a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or a DVD R , the disc isn’t finalized. • Make sure there is a recordable DVD R/ RW loaded with some free space for recording and fewer than 49 titles already on the disc. • If you delete a title from a DVD R/ RW disc, the number of remaining recordable titles may not decrease. • F urther recording is n ot possible on a finalized DVD R . Check th at there isn’t a disc menu on th e disc you’re tr ying to use. • If the title currently playing contains material that is copy-once protected, One T ouch Copy will not work. • If the currently playin g HDD content was recorded in XP mode, the One T ouch Copy feature can’t be used. • One T ouch Copy can ’t be used for titles over eight hours long when copying to DVD R / RW (though you can use a DVD R DL). • One T ouch Copy can’t be used for MN1 to MN6 , SEP , SLP or EP titles when copying to DVD R/ RW . • One T ouch Copy doesn’t work if the recorder is alr eady recording to DVD. Can’t use One Touch Copy (DVD to HDD) • Make sure that there is space av ailable on the HDD and that there are fewer than 999 titles on the HDD. • One T ouch Copy doesn ’t work i f th e recorder is already recording to the HDD. The device connected to the USB port is not recognized • Check that the device is compatible with this recorder (page 23). • Use a USB cable less than 5 m in length. • Check that the USB cable is inserted fully . • Check that the USB device is powered on . • T ry switching this recorder into stan dby mode and then back on. • T r y using the Restart USB D evice option from the Initial Setup menu (page 118). • If several USB devices (camera, USB memor y , card reader , etc.) are connected at the same time, it’s possible that only the first device connected to this recorder will be recognized. File names are not displayed properly. • Files names that do not confo r m to the ISO8859-1 standard may not display correctly on this unit. Problem Remedy DVRLX70_TF_EN.bo ok 126 ページ ２００７年８月 １日　水曜日　午 後４時１４分
Additional information 127 En 15 HDMI Problem Remedy The connected HDMI or DVI device does n ot display any picture (and th e front panel HDMI indicator does not light) • T ry disconnecting then reconnec ting the HDMI c able (while the power of both components is on). • T ry switching the power of the HD MI/DVI device off then back on. • T ry switching off the HDMI/D VI device and this recorder . Next, switch on the HDMI/DV I device and leave it for around 30 seconds, then switch on this recorder . • When you connect an HDMI-c ompa tible device make sure of the following: – The connected device’s video inpu t is set correctly for this unit. – The cable you’re usin g is fully HDMI-compliant. Using a n on- standard cable may result in no picture being output. – Don ’t use several HDMI cables connected together . Use a single cable to connect devices together . • When you connect a DVI-compatible device make sure of the following: – The connected device’s video inpu t is set correctly for this unit. – The DVI terminal on the connected device is HDCP - compatible. – The connected device is compatible with NTSC (720 x 480i/p, 1280 x 720p, 1920 x 1080i/p) and P A L (720 x 576i/p, 1280 x 720p, 1920 x 1080i/p) video input. • If the recorder ’s internal HDD is damaged or broken, there will be no HDMI output. • Not all HDCP -compatible DVI device s will work with this recorder . No video fr om the HDMI outp ut • If you choose a setting that is inco mpatible with your TV you may not be able to see any picture at all. In this case, press  OPEN/ CLOSE while holding down th e  (Stop) button on the front panel to switch the setting (this also switches Component Video Out on page 110 to the default setting). There’s no sound from the connected HDMI or DVI device • There is no sound when using a DVI terminal. • Some HDMI-compatible devices do not output sound (check with the manual that came wi th the connected device). The power automatically turns on • This unit’s power may be turned on each time you turn on the power for a connected plasma television . If you do not want this unit to be turned on in this way , set this unit’s HDMI Co ntrol to OFF (page 117). Can’t record video • When using HDMI Control to reco rd, you must make sure that the channel information for the plasma television matches that of this unit. If the channel information does n ot match you cannot make recordings. Use the Auto Ch annel Setting function to set this unit’s channel information (page 109). DVRLX70_TF_EN.bo ok 127 ページ ２００７年８月 １日　水曜日　午 後４時１４分
Additional information 15 128 En If the unit does not op erate normally due to external effe cts such as static ele ctricity, disconnect the power plug from the outlet and insert again to return to normal op erating conditions. If the picture freezes and the front panel and remote control buttons stop working • Press  (Stop) then try restarting playback. • Press the front panel  STANDBY/ON button to switch the power off, then switch back on and restart playback. If the power fails to switch off, press and hold  STANDBY /ON for five seco nds until the power switches off. HDMI Control does not respo nd • V erify that the HDMI cable is firmly connected (page 21). • Check whether HDMI Control is se t to On for this unit and the device connected to this unit. F o r more information, refer to the operating instru ctions of your pl asma television or A V system. • Depending on the type of pla sma television, some HDMI input terminals do not support the HDMI Control function. F o r details, see the operating instructions supplied wi th your plasma television. • HDMI Control may not operate proper ly if you do not use an HDMI cable that supports the HDMI 1.3 Specification. • This function may not work properly if you have multiple recorders connected to a single plasma television or A V system. F or more informat ion , refer to the operatin g instructions of your plasma television or A V system. • Controls may not func tion properly in certain situations, such as immediately after you have connect an HDM I cable, turn this unit’s power off or remove the po wer cabl e for this unit or the connected component. If you experience any problems, s et HDM I Control to On for all connected units, and then di splay the pictures stored on this unit on y our plasma televisi on to improve the sit uations. • Check whether the connected co mponent supports HDMI Control or not. • Certain functions are not supported o n w i th p la sm a televisions and A V systems. • W e cannot guarantee this unit will work with HDMI Control- compatible components other than those made by P i oneer . When using HDMI Control-compatible components manufactured by companies other than P ioneer , set the H DMI Control to Off (page 117). Problem Remedy HDD/DVD DivX COPY OPEN/CLOSE STANDBY/ON USB DV IN CH INPUT SELECT STOP REC ST ANDBY/ON DVRLX70_TF_EN.bo ok 128 ページ ２００７年８月 １日　水曜日　午 後４時１４分
Additional information 129 En 15 On-screen displays The table below shows a list of error messa ges that you may encounter when using the recorder and an explanatio n of their meaning. Message Explanation/Acti on • Initializing disc. Please w ait a moment. When you load a blank DVD-RW or DVD RW disc, the recorder automatically in itializes it. • Incompatible regi on number. The disc loaded has an incompatible region number for the recorder and so will not play . • Cannot record an y more titles . • No more space for file management data. The disc control data limit has been reached, or the maximum number of chapters and/or titles has been reached. Erase titles/chapters or combine chapt ers. • This dis c cannot be recorde d. Undo the finalization. The disc was finalized on a non- P ioneer DVD recorder . Undo the finalization in order to record ing/edit ing. • Cannot play this d isc. • This disc canno t be recorded. • Cannot read the C PRM information. • Could not record the information to the disc. • Cannot edit. • Could not in itialize disc. • Could not comp lete finalization successfully. • Could not u ndo finalization successfully. • Could not su ccessfully unlock the disc. The disc may be dirty or damaged. T ake out the disc, clean it and retr y . If the error persists, use a new disc. If the error appears even with a new disc, please ask your nearest P ioneer-autho rized ser vice center or your dealer to carr y out repairs. • Incompatible o r unreadable disc. The disc loaded is a play back-only disc type. This display may also appear if the disc is dirty or damaged. • Cannot record to a disc that is not CPRM compatible. • Cannot record this content using Video mode recording. • This video cann ot be recorded to DVD R/ RW. The video source is copy-once protected. Use a VR mode DVD-R/-RW disc with CPRM for recording. • This content is cop y protected. The video source is copy-protected and cannot be record ed. • Incorrect CPRM in formation. The recorder could not read th e CPRM information. The recorder may be damaged — please ask your nearest P ioneer-autho rized ser vice center or your dealer to carr y out repairs. DVRLX70_TF_EN.bo ok 129 ページ ２００７年８月 １日　水曜日　午 後４時１４分
Additional information 15 130 En • Repairing disc. • Repairing th e HDD. During recording, the power was cut. This display appears when the power is restored. • Could not repa ir the disc. The recorder was unable to repair the disc after a power cut. The contents of the recording will be lost. • Over heating has stopped ope ration. Press DISPLAY to clear messag e. The internal temperature of the recorder has exceeded the operating limit. If this message reappears, please ask your nearest P ioneer- authorized ser vice center or your dealer to carry out repairs. • HDD optimizatio n is recommended. This can be done u sing Disc Setup. The HDD shou ld be optimized (basically , HDD housekeeping) to maintain playback and recording per formance. • Please perform HD D optimization. This can be done u sing Disc Setup. The HDD is in more urgent need of optimization in order to maintain per formance. • The HDD has not b een sufficiently optimized. Please optimize ag ain. If this message appears repeatedly after optimizing the HDD it i s likely that there is not enough free space on the HDD for optimization to complete properly . Please erase some titles from the HDD and optimize again . • An error occurred. Please c onsult the service center. Note that contents o n the HDD may be erased when servicing this unit. This message is displayed when information from the HDD cannot be read. The HDD may be damaged or broken. Pleas e ask your nearest P ioneer-authorized ser vice center or your dealer to carr y out repairs. • The Hard Disk Dri ve info is incorrect. Use the Disc Setup menu to reinitial ize. As the HDD info cannot be properly read, no new recordings c an be made. R einiti alizing the HDD (page 104) may result in your being able to make recording again. Note that reinitializing the HDD will erase all recorded contents, including protected files. • There is no DV inpu t or the input signal is unrecordable. No signal was detected at the DV IN jack. This may appear if a blank section of DV tape is playing in the connected camcorder . • No DV camcor der connected. The camcorder is not connected properly , or the camcorder is switched off . • You cannot connect more than one DV camcorder at a time. This recorder ’s DV jack supports connection to just one camcorder . • Cannot operate the DV camcorder. This recorder cannot op erate the DV camcorder . T ry switching off the camcorder then turn it back on again. Message Explanation/Acti on DVRLX70_TF_EN.bo ok 130 ページ ２００７年８月 １日　水曜日　午 後４時１４分
Additional information 131 En 15 Front panel displays The table below shows a list of error messa ges that you may encounter when using the recorder and an explanatio n of their meaning. • Could not operate the D V camcorder. This recorder was not able to operate the DV camco rder . • The DV camcorder is not set for playback. Please selec t playback mode on the DV cam corder. The camcorder is in camer a mode. Switch it to playback mode. • The printer is not ready o r is not connected. Please chec k the printer. This message is displayed when communication could not be established with the printer . See the Troubleshooting section if you do not know the cause. • Printing has b een cancelled because ... This message is displayed when t here is a printer error during pri nting. After checking the prin ter for the cause of the error , ei ther reconnect the printer and start the printing job again, or select “Y es” to resume printing (select “No” to cancel the print job). See also the operating instructions that came with your printer for possibl e causes of print errors. Message Explanation/Acti on • E01 The HDD may be damaged or broken. Please ask your nearest P ioneer-authorized service center or your dealer to carr y out repairs. • E02 As the HDD info cannot be properly read, no new recordings c an be made. R einiti alizing the HDD (page 104) may result in your being able to make recording again. Note that reinitializing the HDD will erase all recorded contents, including protected files. Message Explanation/Acti on DVRLX70_TF_EN.bo ok 131 ページ ２００７年８月 １日　水曜日　午 後４時１４分
Additional information 15 132 En Setting up the remote to control your TV You can use the supplied remote to control your TV. To be able to use this feature you first have to prog ram the remote with a maker code from the table belo w. 1 Press and hold down the CLEAR button, then enter the maker code for your TV. The LED ind icator on th e remote contro ls lights. See the table below for the list of maker codes. If there is more than o ne code given for your make, input the first one in the list. • If the maker’s name o f your TV doesn’t appear in the table below, you will not be able to use th is remote to control your TV. 2 Press  TV to check that the remote works with yo ur TV. If the remote is set up correctly, the TV should sw itch on/off. If it doesn ’t and there is another code given for your ma ker, repeat step 1 with a new code. Using the TV remote control buttons The table below shows how to use this remote control with your TV. Button What it does  TV P ress to switch the TV on/ off (standby) INPUT SELECT P ress to change the TV ’s video input TV VOLUME Use to adjust the TV volume TV CHANNEL Use to change TV channels Maker Code Alba 66 Bush 76 Fi sher 61, 65 Fu j i t s u 7 7 Fu n a i 6 7 Goldstar 79 Grandiente 87 Grundig 51, 82 Hitachi 56, 60, 83, 86 IT T 70 Mitsubishi 59 Nokia 53, 81 P anasonic 58, 72 Philips 57, 85, 89 P ioneer 50, 80 RCA 68 Salora 71 Samsung 73, 75 Sanyo 74 Sei 78 Sharp 52 Sony 54 Ta n d y 6 9 T elefunken 64 Thomson 62, 89 To s h i b a 5 5 JVC 6 3 DVRLX70_TF_EN.bo ok 132 ページ ２００７年８月 １日　水曜日　午 後４時１４分
Additional information 133 En 15 Language code list Language (Language c ode letter), Languag e code Country/Area code list Country/Area, Country/Area code , Code letter Japanese (ja), 1001 English (en), 0514 French (fr), 0618 German (de), 0405 Italian (it), 09 20 Spanish (e s), 0519 Chines e (zh), 2608 Dutch (nl), 1412 Portuguese (pt), 1620 Swedish (sv), 1922 Russian (ru), 1821 Greek (el), 0512 Polish (pl), 1612 Czech (cs), 0319 Norwegia n (no), 1415 Afar (aa), 0101 Abkhazian (ab), 0102 Afrikaans (af), 0106 Amharic (am), 0113 Arabic (ar), 0118 Assamese (as), 0119 Aymara (ay), 0125 Azerbaijani (az), 0126 Bashkir (ba), 0201 Byelorussian (be), 0205 Bulgarian (bg), 0207 Bihari (bh), 0208 Bislama (bi), 0209 Bengali (bn), 0214 Tibetan (bo), 0215 Breton (br), 0218 Catalan (ca), 0301 Corsican (co), 0 315 Welsh (cy), 032 5 Danish (da), 0401 Bhutani (dz), 0426 Esperanto (eo), 0515 Estonian (et), 0520 Basque (eu), 0521 Persian (fa), 0601 Finnish (fi), 0609 Fiji (fj), 0610 Faroes e (fo), 0615 Frisian (fy), 0625 Irish (ga), 0701 Scots-Gaelic (gd), 0704 Galician (gl), 0712 Guarani (gn), 0714 Gujarati (gu), 0721 Hausa (ha), 0801 Hindi (hi), 0809 Croatian (hr), 0818 Hungarian (hu), 0821 Armenian (hy), 0825 Interlingua (ia), 0901 Interlingue (ie), 0905 Inupiak (ik), 0911 Indonesian (in), 0914 Icelandic (is), 0919 Hebrew (iw), 0923 Yiddish (ji), 1009 Javanese (jw), 1023 Georgian (ka), 1101 Kazakh (kk), 1111 Greenlandic (kl), 1112 Cambodian (km), 1113 Kannada (kn), 1114 Korean (ko), 1115 Kashmiri (ks), 1119 Kurdish (ku), 1121 Kirghiz (ky), 1125 Latin (la), 1201 Lingala (ln), 1214 Laotian (lo), 1215 Lithuanian (lt), 1220 Latvian (lv), 1222 Malagasy (mg), 1307 Maori (mi), 1309 Macedonian (mk), 1311 Malayalam (ml), 1312 Mongolian (mn), 1314 Moldavian (mo), 1315 Marathi (mr), 1318 Malay (ms), 1319 Maltese (mt), 1320 Burmes e (my), 1325 Nauru (na), 1401 Nepali (ne), 1405 Occitan (oc), 1503 Oromo (om), 1513 Oriya (or), 1518 Panjabi (pa), 1601 Pashto, Pushto (ps), 1619 Quechua (qu), 1721 Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813 Kirundi (rn), 1814 Roma nian ( ro), 1815 Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823 Sanskrit (sa), 1901 Sindhi (sd), 1904 Sangho (sg), 1907 Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908 Sinhalese (si), 1909 Slovak (sk), 1911 Slovenian (sl), 1912 Samoan (sm), 1913 Shona (sn), 1914 Somali (so), 1915 Albanian (sq), 1917 Serbian (sr), 1918 Siswati (ss), 1919 Sesotho (st), 1920 Sundanese (su), 1921 Swahili (sw), 1923 Tamil (ta), 2001 Telugu (te), 2005 Tajik (tg), 2007 Thai (th), 2008 Tigrinya (ti), 2009 Turkmen (tk), 2011 Tagalog (tl), 20 12 Setswana (tn), 2014 Tonga (to), 2015 Turkish (tr), 2018 Tsonga (ts), 2019 Tatar (tt), 2020 Twi (tw), 2023 Ukrainian (uk), 2111 Urdu (ur), 2118 Uzbek (uz), 2126 Vietnamese (vi), 2209 Volapük (vo), 2215 Wolof (wo), 2315 Xhosa (xh), 2408 Yorub a (yo), 2515 Zulu (zu), 2621 Argentina, 0118 , ar Australia, 0121 , au Austria, 0120 , at Belgium, 0205 , be Brazil, 0218 , br Canada, 0301 , ca Chile, 0312 , cl China, 0314 , cn Denmark, 0411 , dk Finland, 0609 , fi France, 0618 , fr Germany, 0405 , de Hong Kong, 0811 , hk India, 0914 , in Indonesia, 0904 , id Italy, 0920 , it Japa n, 1016 , jp Repub lic of Korea, 1118 , kr Malaysia, 1325 , my Mexico, 1324 , mx Netherlands, 1412 , nl New Zealand, 1426 , nz Norway, 1415 , no Pakistan, 1611 , pk Philippines, 1608 , ph Portugal, 1620 , pt Russian Feder ation, 1821 , ru Singapor e, 1907 , sg Spain , 0519 , es Sweden, 1905 , se Switzerland, 0308 , ch Taiwan, 2023 , tw Thailand, 2008 , th United Kingdom, 0702 , gb USA, 2119 , us DVRLX70_TF_EN.bo ok 133 ページ ２００７年８月 １日　水曜日　午 後４時１４分
Additional information 15 134 En Screen sizes and disc formats When viewing o n a standard TV or monitor Screen format of disc Setting Appe arance 16:9 4:3 (Letter Box) The programme is shown in widescreen with black bars at the top and bottom of the screen. 4:3 (Pan & Scan) The sides of the programme are cropped so that the picture fill s the whole screen . 4:3 4:3 (Letter Box) 4:3 (Pan & Scan) The programme is presented correctly on either setting. When viewing o n a widescreen TV or monitor Screen format of disc Setting Appe arance 16:9 16:9 The programme is presented in widescreen. 4:3 16:9 Y our TV will determine h ow the picture is presented — check the manual that came with the TV for details. DVRLX70_TF_EN.bo ok 134 ページ ２００７年８月 １日　水曜日　午 後４時１４分
Additional information 135 En 15 Handling discs When holding discs of any type, take care not to leave fingerprints, dirt or scratches on the disc surface. Hold the disc by its edge or by the center hole and edge. Damaged or dirty discs can aff ect playback and recording p erformance. Take care a lso not to scratch the l abel side of the disc. Although not as fragile as the recorded side, scratches can still result in a disc becoming unusable. Should a disc bec ome marked with fingerprints, dust, etc. , clean using a soft, dry cloth, wiping the dis c lightly from the center to the outside ed ge. Do not wipe wit h a circul ar motion. If necessary, use a c loth soaked in alcoho l, or a commerci ally available CD/ DVD cleaning kit to clean a disc more thoroughly. Never use benzine, th inner or other cleaning agents, including pr oducts designed for cleaning vinyl records. Storing discs Although CDs and DVD discs are more durable than vinyl records, you should still take care to han dle and store discs correctly. When you’re n ot using a di sc, return it to it s case and store upright. Avoid leaving discs in excessively cold, humid, or h ot environments (in cluding under direct sunlight ). Don’t glue paper or put stickers onto the disc, or use a penc il, ball-point pen or other sharp-ti pped writing instrument. Thes e could all damage the disc. For more detailed care information see the instructions that come with discs. Do not load m ore than one disc into the recorder. Damaged discs Discs spin at high speed inside the recorder. If you can see that a disc is cra cked, chipped, warped, or otherwise damaged, don’t risk using it; you could e nd up damaging the recorder. This recorder is designed for us e with conventional, fully circular discs only. Use of shaped discs is not recommended for this product. Pioneer disc laims all lia bility arising in co nnection with the use of shaped discs. Cleaning the pickup lens The HDD/DVD recorder’s len s should not become dirty in normal us e, but if for some reason it should malfunc tion due to dust or dirt, consult your nearest Pioneer-a uthorized service center. Although len s cleaners are commercially av ailable, we do not recommend using them since some may damage the lens. Condensation Condensation may form inside the recorder if it is bro ught into a w arm room from outside, or if the temperature of th e room rises quickly. Althou gh the condensation won’t damage the recorder, it may temporarily impair its perform ance. For this reason you should leave it to adjust to the warmer temperature for about a n hour before switching on and using. DVRLX70_TF_EN.bo ok 135 ページ ２００７年８月 １日　水曜日　午 後４時１４分
Additional information 15 136 En Hints on installation We want you to enjoy using this unit for years to come, so please bea r in mind the following points when c hoosing a suitable locatio n for it: Do...  Use in a well-ventilated roo m.  Place on a solid, flat , level surface, such as a table, shelf or stereo rack. Don’t...  Use in a place exposed to high temperatures or humidity, including near radiators and other heat-generating applianc es.  Place o n a window sill or other plac e where the recorder will be ex posed to direct sunlight .  Use in a du sty or damp environment or in a room where it will be exposed to excessive cigarette sm oke.  Plac e directly on top of an amplif ier, or other component in you r stereo system that becomes hot in use.  Use near a television or monitor as you may experience interference — especia lly if the television uses an indoor antenna.  Use in a kitchen or other room where the recorder may be exposed to smoke or steam .  Use on a thick rug or carpet, or cover with cloth — this may prevent proper co oling of the un it.  Place on a n unstable surface, or o ne that is not large enough to support all fou r of the unit’s feet. Moving the recorder If you need to move the recorder, fir st remove the disc, if loaded, and close the disc tray. Next, press  STANDBY/ON to switch the power to standby, checking th at the POWER OFF indicatio n in the display goes off. Wait at least two minutes. Lastly, disconnect the power cord. Never lift or move the unit during playback or recording — discs rotate at a high speed and may be damaged. Resetting the recorder If you need to, you can rese t the recorder to all its factory sett ings. 1 Make sure that the recorder is on. 2 Using the front pan el controls, pr ess and hold  (Stop) and press  STANDBY/ ON. The recorder turns off with all settings reset. DVRLX70_TF_EN.bo ok 136 ページ ２００７年８月 １日　水曜日　午 後４時１４分
Additional information 137 En 15 Specifications General Power req uirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 V to 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 W Power consumption i n standby mode (Front panel display: off) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.38 W Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6 kg Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 mm (W) x 77 mm (H) x 355 mm (D) Operating temperat ure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 °C to 35 °C Operating humi dity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 % to 85 % (no condensation) TV system Taiwan a nd Philippin es model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NTSC Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAL/SECAM/NTSC Readable discs DVD-Video, DVD-RW, DVD-R, DVD R, DVD RW, DVD-RAM, Video CD, Super VCD, CD, CD-R/-RW (WMA, MP3, J P EG, CD-D A, DivX) Recording discs and formats DVD-R/-RW: VR mode and Video mode DVD R/ RW: VR mode DVD-RAM: VR mode DVD-R DL: VR mode and V ideo mode DVD R DL: VR mode Video recording format Sampling frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.5 MHz Compression format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .MPEG Audio recordin g format Sampling frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 kHz Compression format . . . . Dolby Digital or Linear PCM (uncompressed) Recording time HDD (500 GB) XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 72 h Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 106 h Standard Play (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 212 h Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 424 h Extended Play (EP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 638 h Super Long Play (SLP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 850 h Super Extended Play (SEP) . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1064 h Manual Mode (MN) . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 72 h to 1422 h DVD-R/-RW, DVD R/ RW, DVD-RAM Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h Standard Play (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 2 h Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 4 h Extended Play (EP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 6 h Super Long Play (SLP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 8 h Super Extended Play (SEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 10 h (DVD-R/-RW, DVD-RAM only) Manual Mode (MN) DVD-R/-RW/-RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h to 13 h DVD R/ RW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h to 8 h DVD-R DL/DVD R DL Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h 51 m Standard Play (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 3 h 35 m Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 7 h 11 m Extended Play (EP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . App r ox. 10 h 46 m Super Long Play (SLP) . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 14 h 21 m Super Extended Play (SEP) . . . . . . . Approx. 17 h 57 m (DVD-R DL only) Manual Mode (MN) DVD-R DL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A pprox. 1 h 51 m to 24 h DVD R DL . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h 51 m to 14 h 21 m Timer Programmes. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 month/32 programmes Clock Taiwa n and Philippi nes model . . . . . . . . . . . . Quartz lock (12-hour digital display 1 ) Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quartz lock (24-hour digital display) Note 1 I f the country is set to Philippines the clock switches to 24 hour display. DVRLX70_TF_EN.bo ok 137 ページ ２００７年８月 １日　水曜日　午 後４時１４分
Additional information 15 138 En Tuner Receivable channels Taiwan and Phi lippines model: Other: Input/Output VHF/UHF a ntenna input/ou tput terminal Taiwan and Philip pines model . . . VHF/UHF set 75 Ω (F-shape connector) Other . . . . . . . . . VHF/UHF set 75 Ω (IEC connector) Video Input 1 (rear), 2 (front), 3 (rear) Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω ) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R CA jacks Video Output 1, 2 Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Vp-p (75 Ω ) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R CA jacks S-Video Input 1 (rear), 2 (front), 3 (rear) Y (luminance) - Input level. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω ) C (colour) - Input level Taiwan and Philip pines model . . . . 286 mVp-p (75 Ω ) Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 mVp-p (75 Ω ) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-pin mini DIN S-Video Output 1, 2 Y (luminance) - Output level . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω ) C (colour) - Output level Taiwan and Philip pines model . . . . 286 mVp-p (75 Ω ) Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 mVp-p (75 Ω ) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-pin mini DIN Component video outp ut Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Y: 1.0 Vp-p (75 Ω ) P B , P R : 0.7 Vp-p (75 Ω ) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R CA jacks Audio Input 1 (rear), 2 (front), 3 (rear) L/R During audio input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 V rms (Input impedance: more t han 22 k Ω ) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R CA jacks Audio Output 1, 2 L/ R During audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 V rms (Output impedance: les s than 1.5 k Ω ) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R CA jacks Other connections Control input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M ini jack Digital audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coaxial DV input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-pin (front) (i.LINK/IEEE 1 394 standard) USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type A (front), Type B (front) HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-pin Supplied accessories Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Dry cell batteries (AA/R6P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Audio/Vide o cable (red/white/ye llow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 RF antenna cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Operating Instruction s Note: The spe cifications and design of this product are subject to change without noti ce, due to improvemen t. Micros oft prod uct scree n shots r eprinte d with permission from Microsoft Corporatio n. Channel 2 to 13 14 to 69 C1 to C125 Frequen cy 55 MHz to 218 MHz 471 MHz to 808 MHz 72 MHz to 806 MHz NTSC-M/N STEREO M/N - BTSC VHF UHF CATV VHF (low) VHF (high) Hyper UHF Channel E2 to E4 X to Z E5 to E12 S1 to S20 M1 to M10 U1 to U10 S21 to S41 E21 to E69 Frequen cy 47 MHz to 89 MHz 104 MHz to 300 MHz 302 MHz to 470 MHz 470 MHz to 862 MHz Channel A to C X to Z D to J 11, 13 S1 to S20 S21 to S41 E21 to E69 Frequen cy 44 MHz to 89 MHz 104 MHz to 300 MHz 302 MHz to 470 MHz 470 MHz to 862 MHz SECAM B/G PAL B/G PAL I Channel 2 to 13 14 to 69 C1 to C125 Frequen cy 55 MHz to 218 MHz 471 MHz to 808 MHz 72 MHz to 806 MHz NTSC-M/N Channel R1 to R5 R6 to R12 S1 to S20 S21 to S41 E21 to E69 Frequen cy 49 MHz to 94 MHz 104 MHz to 300 MHz 302 MHz to 470 MHz 470 MHz to 862 MHz SECAM D/K PAL D/K STEREO B/G - A2 I - NICAM B/G - NICAM D/K - NICAM M/N - BTSC VHF UHF CATV VHF (low) VHF (high) Hyper UHF This product includes F ontAvenue ® fonts licenced by NEC Corporation. F ontA venue is a r egistered trademark of NEC Corporation. DVRLX70_TF_EN.bo ok 138 ページ ２００７年８月 １日　水曜日　午 後４時１４分
HDD/D VD RECORDER Operating Instructions <VRB1477-A> Published b y Pioneer Cor poration. Cop yr ight © 2007 Pioneer Cor poration. All rights reser ved. PIONEER CORPORA TION 4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, T okyo 153-8654, J apan PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. P .O . BO X 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S .A. TEL: (800) 421-1404 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANAD A, INC. 300 Allstate P arkway , Markham, Ontar io L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411 PIONEER EUROPE NV Hav en 1087, K eetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIA CENTRE PTE. L TD . 253 Ale xandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555 PIONEER ELECTRONICS A USTRALIA PTY . L TD . 178-184 Boundar y Road, Braeside , Victor ia 3195, A ustralia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V . Blvd.Manuel A vila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Me xico ,D .F . 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270 K002_B_En Printed in China 00 Cover_bac k_TF.fm 1 ページ ２００７ 年７月２日　月曜日　 午後４時１８分